baguio general hospital medical center proposed multi ...

BAGUIO GENERAL HOSPITAL MEDICAL CENTER

PROPOSED MULTI-SPECIALTY CENTER BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

ARCHION ARCHITECTS G/F PIECO BUILDING

2242 DON CHINO ROCES AVENUE, MAKATI CITY, PHILIPPINES

T +632 817 1115 to 16 F +632 817 0792

[email protected]

Daniel A. Lichauco ARCHITECT

REG NO. :

PTR NO. :

DATE ISSUED :

ISSUED AT :

TIN NO. :

9243 6621354 09, January 2018 Makati City 168-489-629

mailto:[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Archion Architects Architectural Specification

Section 01000 – General Conditions

Section 014000 – Quality Requirements

Section 031513 - Waterstops

Section 033000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete Formworks

Section 033500 – Concrete Finishing

Section 035300 – Concrete Topping

Section 042000 – Unit Masonry

Section 051200 – Structural Steel Framing

Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications

Section 055213 - Pipe and Tube Railings

Section 055300 - Metal Gratings

Section 057000 - Decorative Metal

Section 064023 - Interior Architectural Woodwork

Section 071354 - Thermoplastic Sheet Waterproofing

Section 071416 – Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing

Section 071416 - Crystalline Waterproofing

Section 071700 - Bentonite Waterproofing

Section 072100 – Thermal Insulation

Section 076100 – Sheet Metal Roofing

Section 078413 - Penetration Firestopping

Section 078446 - Fire-Resistive Joint Systems

Section 079200 – Joint Sealants

Section 081113 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

Section 081119 - Stainless Steel Doors

Section 081216 – Aluminum Frames

Section 081416 – Flush Wood Doors

Section 083113 - Access Doors and Frames

Section 083213 - Sliding Aluminum-Framed Glass Doors

Section 084113 - Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts

Section 084413 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls

Section 085113 – Aluminum Windows

Section 087100 – Door Hardware

Section 088000 – Glazing

Section 088300 - Mirrors

Section 089000 - Louvers and Vents

Section 092216 - Non-structural Metal Framing

Section 092400 – Portland Cement Plastering

Section 092900 – Gypsum Board

Section 093000 – Tiling

Section 095123 – Acoustic Tile Ceiling

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Archion Architects Architectural Specification

Section 095423 - Linear Metal Ceilings

Section 096513 - Resilient Base and Accessories

Section 096519 - Resilient Sheet Flooring

Section 096519 – Resilient Tile Flooring

Section 096536 - Static Control Resilient Flooring

Section 097500 - Stone Facing

Section 099123 – Interior Painting

Section 099600 – High Performance Coatings

Section 099653 - Elastomeric Coating

Section 101400 - Signage

Section 102113 - Toilet Compartments

Section 102123 - Cubicles

Section 102600 - Wall and Door Protection

Section 102800 - Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories

Section 123200 - Manufactured Casework

Section 123570 – Healthcare Casework

Section 123640 – Stone Countertops

Section 123661 - Simulated Stone Countertops

Section 142100 - Electric Traction Elevators

Section 224300 - Medical Plumbing Fixtures

Section 313116 - Termite Control

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :

BAGUIO GENERAL HOSPITALBGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines01000 – GENERAL CONDITIONS

01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Page 1 of 3 Archion Architects Architectural Specification

SECTION 01000

GENERAL CONDITIONS

PART 1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK: The work to be performed under this Contract consists of the furnishing of all materials, labor and equipment, transportation and other facilities necessary to complete the project in accordance with these Specifications and Contract Drawings.

1.2 QUALIFICATION: Specified work shall be done only by licensed and certified Contractor. Contractor shall be familiar with all the works involved and shall hire only skilled personnel specializing in such work description needed.

1.3 GUARANTEE and WARRANTY: All materials specified should entail a guarantee and a warranty from the suppliers. Guarantees and warranties not fulfilled by the supplier shall be considered unlawful; materials they carry shall automatically be waived. Continual use of the material / s shall be under the discretion of the Architect and Owner.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE: Materials specified must be delivered at least ten days before its actual installation. All materials shall be handled with care. Any damage done shall not be charged to the owner and must be replaced immediately. A suitable place for storage should be accommodated within the site.

1.5 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED: The contractor shall comply with all the laws, City-Municipal Ordinances and all government Specifications and regulations in so far as they are binding upon or affect the portion of the work hereto. The Contractor or those engaged thereon shall obtain all necessary licenses and permits and be responsible for all damages to persons or property that may occur in connection with the prosecution of the work.

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL: All materials that will be specified herein shall be under strict compliance to the quality required by the project. All materials must undergo tests. All test results shall be submitted to the Architect and the Owner’s Representative (Project Manager) before and after delivery of materials to the site. If tests are not needed, all materials should pass the judgement of the Architect and the Owner. Materials delivered to the site, which are not approved by the Architect, should be returned immediately to the supplier.

1.7 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: It shall be the duty of the Contractor to carefully examine, compare and verify the data furnished by the Plans and Specifications. In case of obscurity or discrepancy in the Plans and Specifications, the Contractor shall submit the matter to the Architect or his authorized representative for the proper explanation or necessary correction, before any adjustment shall be made.

PART 2.0 MATERIALS

2.1 MATERIALS: Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new. The quality of materials shall be of the best grade of their respective kinds for the purpose. The work shall be performed in the best and most acceptable manner in strict accordance with the requirements of the Plans and Specifications. Preference will be given to articles or materials of domestic production, conditions of quality and price being equal.

2.2 SAMPLES AND INFORMATION ON MATERIALS: When required in the Specifications, or when called for by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish, for approval, full

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :

BAGUIO GENERAL HOSPITAL

BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 01000 – GENERAL CONDITIONS



information and satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials or articles he will incorporate in the work. The Contractor shall furnish, for Architect and Owner's approval, all samples when so directed. The work shall be in accordance with approved samples. Materials and articles installed or used without such approval shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection.

Any failure on the part of the Contractor to conform or use materials that are not specified herein shall be under subsequent rejection. Any alteration or revision of material usage without approval from the Architect shall make the Contractor responsible and liable in terms of guarantee, workmanship and defects.

PART 3.0 WORKMANSHIP

3.1 WORKMANSHIP: All operations required under any and all parts of the Specifications shall be undertaken in a neat, workmanlike manner. Only skilled personnel with sufficient experience in similar operations shall be allowed to undertake the same. Any alteration or revision on the execution of Drawings without approval from the Architect shall be under subsequent rejection and shall make the Contractor responsible and liable for any workmanship and execution defects.

3.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES: The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate weather-tight temporary facilities with water, light, and toilet facilities. He shall keep such places clean and free from flies, mosquitoes and other pests; remove all connections and appliances connected there with prior to the completion of the Contract; and leave the premises perfectly clean. The Contractor shall furnish all temporary lights and power and shall pay all expenses in connection therewith. Furthermore, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all water expenses for building purposes that are required by all trades.

3.3 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY: The Contractor shall put up and continuously maintain adequate protection of all his work from damage and shall protect the Owner's property and adjoining property, as well as all materials furnished and delivered to him by the Owner. He shall make good any such damage, injury or loss, except such as may be caused by agents or employees of the Owner, or due to causes considered as an Act of God.

PART 4.0 INSPECTION

4.1 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE: Whenever the Contractor is not at the site, orders maybe given by the Owner to his authorized representative (Project Manager) and shall be accepted and complied with by the superintendent or foreman of the Contractor.

4.2 INSPECTION OF WORK: The Architect or Project Manager shall, at all times have access to the work whenever it is in preparation or progress and the Contractor shall provide facilities for such access for inspection.

4.3 DISPUTES: The Architect shall, within a reasonable time, make decisions on all claims of the Owner or Contractor and on all matters relating to the execution and progress of the work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents.

Except as otherwise specifically provided in this Contract, all disputes concerning questions of fact arising under this contract shall be decided by the Architect, whose decisions shall be final and conclusive upon the parties as to questions of fact.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 01000 – GENERAL CONDITIONS



4.4 CLEAN UP: The Contractor, prior to the turn-over of the work to the Owner, shall remove any rubbish from the premises and all tools, scaffolding, equipment and all materials not the property of the Owner.

END OF SECTION 01000

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 014000 – QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


SECTION 014000

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1.0 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division-1 Specifications Section shall apply to work of this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control servicesthat are to be performed by the Contractor and his subcontractors for all aspects of projectcoordination, administration, monitoring and execution. This procedure requires that theContractor establish an independent internal team staffed apart from the Contractorsadministrative team whose sole responsibility is to provide quality assurance monitoring andquality control reporting and implementation of specified standards. This independent teamshall act as a separate audit and shall report to the Project Manager and Contractor’sadministrative staff on a weekly basis covering all aspects of work or preparation for work notyet began and implementation of repair works and monitoring of repair.

B. Quality control services include submittals, scheduling, assisting and implementinginspections and tests and related actions including reports, performed by independentagencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor. They do not include Contractenforcement activities performed by the Architect.

C. Independent inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance withrequirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor ofresponsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements but act as a crosscheck ofthe effectiveness of the required Quality Assurance / Quality Control Program implemented bythe Contractor.

D. Requirements of this Section related to customized fabrication and installation procedures, notproduction of standard products unless the individual products form part of an assemblyrequiring components to be individually tested to accepted Industry Test Standards andregulatory practices.

1. Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities arespecified in the Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements,including inspections and tests, cover production of standard products as wellas customized fabrication and installation procedures.

2. Inspections, test and related actions specified are not intended to limit theContractor’s quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with ContractDocument requirements.

3. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services requiredby the Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited byprovisions of this Section.

E. In addition to all other specified requirements whether specifically identified or not, the Ownerand/or its duly authorized representative reserves the right to observe, inspect, test, evaluate,etc., and request additional documentation of all items incorporated into the work.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





F. The overall system of Contractor’s Quality Assurance / Quality Control, the testing by theContractor as directed, and independent audit testing all are based on the premise that properperformance of its building, the structure and other component systems and finishes dependon construction which accurately represents the design meets industry standards and meetsthe specifications and Code requirements.

1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor’s Responsibilities: The Contractor shall form a Quality Assurance/ Quality Control Team including members of his sub-contract trades where aprocedures manual is established to indicate quality monitoring efforts required byeach trade, specifications and industry standard, coordinated with the constructionschedule. This team shall review and monitor project organization, procurementefforts, administrative and organizational efforts in internal communications,checking of shop drawings and submittal preparation, logistics andimplementation of mock-ups and reviews, schedule and implementation of testsby the contractor or independent audit testing and all re-testing necessary andinternal inspection efforts which monitor each trade work. In this effort, theQuality Assurance / Quality Control Team must directly review all aspects of theworks and prepare weekly reports on all activities indicated in the QualityAssurance / Quality Control Program Manual. The manual to be prepared by theContractor shall include copies of all types of documents used for monitoring,testing and inspection prepared by signatory of QA Team and signed by theProject Manager. The Contractor’s Quality Assurance / Quality Control Teamshall perform overall independent evaluation and tracking of all aspects of theproject including verification works during the defects and liability period andadministration of all trade or product warranties and guarantees. This effort shallinclude direct review and counter signature by Quality Assurance / Quality ControlStaff that indicates their involvement and agreement that schedules are beingestablished and followed, that safety programs are being implemented asdesigned, that procurement, handling and storage of products or materials isadequate, that product, shop drawing or other submittals are complete andcoordinated, that fabrication, installation and protection of works is in accordancewith specified standards or standards of practice, that all testing andcommissioning of systems yields complete and optimum performance, that alltesting of materials and assemblies is complete and satisfactory, and that allrectification of faults, damage on other inadequate construction is being rectified,replaced or restored. The Contractor’s Quality Assurance Team shall create allforms and stamp and sign all documents indicating that they have performed theirreview, evaluation or other necessary monitoring to ensure compliance with theContract Documents and conditions of the contract. The Quality Assurance /Quality Control will prepare a weekly report including a narrative summary of theirefforts for each type of activity, whether administrative or direct field observation,and compiling copies of all of the current Quality Assurance / Quality ControlDocuments. This report shall include all trade efforts and shall be part of andform an agenda for a weekly Quality Assurance / Quality Control monitoring effortto be conducted by the Project Manager. The report must indicate roles andresponsibilities of all Quality Assurance / Quality Control personnel.

B. Testing: The Contractor’s Quality Assurance / Quality Control Team shall provide inspections,tests and similar quality control services, specified in individual specifications sections andrequired by governing authorities, except where they are specifically indicated to be theOwner’s responsibility, or are provided by another identified entity; these services includethose specified to be performed by an independent agency and not by the Contractor. Costsfor these services shall be included in the Contract Sum.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





1. The Contractor shall employ and pay an independent agency, to performspecified quality control services.

2. The Owner and/or its duly authorized representative may arrangeindependent testing to evaluate the adequacy of Contractor’s QualityAssurance.

3. Testing, inspection, observation, evaluation, monitoring, etc. by the Owner,Project Manager, Architect or others shall in no way relieve the Contractorfrom his obligation and sole responsibility to follow the Contract Documentsimplicitly and to provide the designated quality and quantity of materials andworkmanship for all stages of the project.

4. Regardless of any tests inspections or evaluations by Contractor’s QualityAssurance program whether specified or not specified (such as millcertificates, etc.), the Contractor shall solely be responsible for all materialsand work completed.

5. Similarly, regardless of any additional testing directed the Owner or otherswhich is conducted by the Contractor, and regardless of all additionalinspections, tests, evaluations or presence on site of the Owner or others, theContractor is solely responsible for the materials and work completed.

C. Re-testing: The Contractor’s Quality Assurance / Quality Control Team isresponsible for re-testing where results of required inspections, tests or similarservices prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with ContractorDocument requirements, regardless of whether the original tests was theContractor’s responsibility.

1. Cost of re-testing construction revised or replaced by the Contractor is theContractor’s responsibility, where required tests were performed on originalconstruction.

2. The Contractor’s Quality Assurance / Quality Control Team shall performadditional testing as directed by Project Manager or others as specified but inno case less than 10 percent additional tests shall be performed at noadditional cost or extension of time.

D. Associated Services: The Contractor’s Quality Assurance / Quality ControlTeam shall cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests andsimilar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notifythe agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment ofpersonnel. Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to:

1. Providing access to the work and furnishing incidental labor and facilitiesnecessary to facilitate inspections and tests.

2. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials thatrequire testing or assisting the agency in taking samples.

3. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery ofsamples to testing laboratories.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





4. Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use formaterials mixes that require control by the testing agency.

5. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project site.

6. Inform the Project Manager and the Architect with at least one week’sadvance notice when work is to be accomplished.

E. Duties of Testing Agency: The independent testing agency engaged toperform inspections, sampling and testing of materials and construction specifiedin individual Specifications Sections shall cooperate with the Architect andContractor in performance of its duties, and shall provide qualified personnel toperform required inspections and tests.

1. The Independent Testing Agency shall notify the Architect and Contractorpromptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the work duringperformance of its services.

2. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter or enlarge requirementsof the Contract Documents, or approved or accept any portion of the work.

3. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.

4. Testing laboratory or similar terminology utilized in specifications shall indicate“Contractor’s Testing Laboratory”.

5. The Contractor shall retain an experienced and qualified firm with a minimumof 10 years experience with top-level technical management havingregistration as “Civil Engineer” in their country of origin. The agency shallretain locally registered engineers as may be mandated by the BuildingOfficial if they so require.

6. Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to performinspections, tests and similar services shall coordinate the sequence ofactivities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. Inaddition to the Contractor and each agency shall coordinate activities to avoidthe necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodateinspections and tests.

a. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections,tests, taking samples and similar activities.

F. Review of Submittals: The Contractor’s Quality Assurance / Quality ControlTeam shall review each submittal of products, materials, shop drawings, manuals,samples, data, test results, coordination drawings or other such documentsrequired for the Architects review to establish that the submittal is accurate,complete and coordinated by each trade related to execution of the particularsubmittal work. Upon such review by the Contractor’s Quality Assurance / QualityControl Team, they shall sign all transmittal documents indicating theirconcurrence that the submittals are in accordance with the Contract Documents.

G. Site Works Review & Monitoring: The Contractor’s Quality Assurance /Quality Control Team shall perform continuous observation of works and reporton findings on a weekly basis at maximum, or at frequency as field conditionsrequire if daily during critical works. Contractor’s daily construction logs may be

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





used for such purposes and shall contain location for Quality Assurance / Quality Control Team comment and signature.

H. Defect Monitoring & Rectification: The Contractor’s Quality Assurance /Quality Control Team must report on findings where defective materials, systemsor workmanship requires review, replacement or other restoration. This mustoccur on a continual basis and be answered through a report by QualityAssurance / Quality Control Team Director.

I. Monitoring of Protection & Safety: The Contractor’s Quality Assurance /Quality Control Team will perform monitoring and reporting of protection ofpersonnel and property for all areas. Such monitoring shall identify deficiencieson hazards to staff or works and suggest remedy.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor’s Quality Assurance / Quality Control Team or independenttesting agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection, test orsimilar service, to the Architect, in duplicate, unless the Contractor is responsiblefor the service, submit a certified written report of each inspection, test or similarservice through the Contractor, in duplicate.

1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governingauthority and the Project Manager when the authority so directs.

B. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test or similar services shall include, but notlimit to the following:

1. Date of issue.2. Project title and number.3. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency or Quality Assurance

Personnel.4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.5. Names of individuals making the inspection or tests including Owner’s

Representative.6. Designation of the work and test method.7. Identification of product and specifications sections.8. Complete inspection or test data.9. Test results and interpretations of test results.10. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.11. Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested work

complies with Contract Document requirements.12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.13. Recommendation on re-testing or rectification.14. Recommendation on protection of fieldwork.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualification for Service Independent Agencies: Engage inspection andtesting service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, which arepre-qualified as complying with “Recommended Requirements for IndependentLaboratory Qualification” by the Architect and Owner, and which specialize in thetypes of inspections and tests to be performed.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





B. Whether specifically indicated or not, the Contractor’s Quality Assurance shallinclude review of all materials and equipment proposed for use in the projectwhether natural (aggregates, etc.); or manufactured (cement, pipe, a pump, a fan,a transformer, etc.)

1.6 OWNER’S AUDIT TESTING

A. Owner may elect to perform Quality Audit Testing in cases of questionable materials orplacement, and for random testing or evaluations for acceptance or other confirmations.

B. The extent, duration and amount of testing and/or evaluation is entirely at thediscretion of the Owner even to the extent of doubling or reducing to zero thescope stated or implied.

C. The Owner either separately or through the Project Manager will retainqualified inspectors to perform Quality Surveillance to audit the Contractor’sQuality Assurance (QA) program and evaluations.

PART 2.0 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR & PROTECTION

A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and similarservices, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes toeliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposedfinishes. Comply with Contract Documents requirements for “SelectiveDemolition”.

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, andprotect repaired construction.

C. Repair and protection is the Contractor’s responsibilities, regardless of theassignment of responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 031513 - WATERSTOPS

03 - CONCRETE


SECTION 031513 – WATERSTOPS

PART 1.0 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes Swellable (hydrophilic) strip waterstop embedded continuously alongconcrete non-moving construction joints creating a continuous barrier to water migration.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1.3 REFERENCES

C. ASTM – American Society of Testing and Materials

D. BS 8102

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Submit product data to substantiatecompliance with specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Show construction joint types, layout, and location.

C. Material sample representative of waterstop to be used on job, full profile 100mm long,clearly labeled with manufacturer’s name and product identification.

D. Certification to hydrostatic pressure resistance of not less than 100 psi.

E. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) on waterstop strip primer adhesive.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirementsin Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified bywaterstop manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to installmanufacturer’s products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer’s willingnessto sell its product to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itselfconfer qualification on the buyer.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



03 - CONCRETE


C. Source Limitations: Obtain waterstop through one source from a single manufacturer.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in factory sealed and labeled packaging.

B. Store waterstop in factory package to protect from oil, dirt, and prolonged ultravioletexposure.

C. Store waterstop under cover to protect from moisture that may cause premature waterstopswelling.

PART 2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide products manufactured by CETCO

B. WATERSTOP MATERIAL

1. Swellable Strip Waterstops: Volclay Waterstop RX: Black extruded strip (25mm x20mm and 15mm x 10mm cross section) of sodium bentonite/ butyl rubber (combinedin fixed proportions under controlled conditions), with one side backed by a siliconetreated paper.

2. Quality Control includes checks on:

a. Bentonite :1) Particle sizes2) Swell characteristics3) Filtrate loss4) Free moisture content5) Imbibition

b. Waterstop RX1) Swell characteristics2) Specific Gravity3) Penetration

3. Properties:

a. Specific gravity — ASTM D71: 1.35b. Hydrocarbon content — ASTM D4: 47%c. Volatile matter — ASTM D6: 1%d. Penetration cone in accordance with ASTM D217 at 77 degrees F (25

degrees C): 40 mme. Service temperature range: -30 to 180 degrees F (-34 to 82 degrees C)

4. Accessories:a. Concrete cut nails for securing waterstop to vertical joint face.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



03 - CONCRETE


PART 3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Ensure steel reinforcing bars do not interfere with proper position of waterstop.

B. Protect waterstops during progress of work.

C. Clean joints of dirt and construction debris.

D. Joint surfaces should be clean, dry and free from cavities and spalling. Any irregularities inthe surface are filled with cement grout or mortar while concrete is still green, and madesmooth.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Do not apply waterstop during heavy rainfall or where there is free-standing water.

B. Footing to Wall Joints

1. A strip of Waterstop RX is cut to length and with the release paper removed, is stuckto the footing, normally on the inside of the outermost reinforcing bars and not in thekeyway.

2. To prevent movement during concrete placement, the strip of Waterstop RX ismechanically fixed to the concrete, at a spacing of approximately 300mm using hardnails.

C. Basement Slab Joints

1. Strips of Waterstop RX are cut to length and with the release paper removed, arestuck to the slab joint, normally on the underside (ground side) of the reinforcing bars.To prevent the strip from sagging it may be necessary to fix it to a reinforcing bar bywiring at 400mm to 500mm intervals, as well as nailing it to the slab at 300mmintervals.

D. Vertical wall joints

1. Waterstop RX is cut to length and with the release paper removed, is stuck directly tothe concrete, normally inside of the outermost reinforcing bars. The strip is fixed inposition with hard nails applied approximately 300mm intervals. To prevent slip it maybe necessary to wire the strip to a stiffening rib.

2. Successive lengths are butt jointed. Press ends together to ensure no separation andno air pockets. Place in maximum practical lengths to minimize splicing. Cut coilends square with sharp blade to fit splices together without overlaps.

E. Swelling

1. If the material exhibits considerable swelling prior to confinement in the joint, it mustbe replaced with new material.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



03 - CONCRETE


F. Concrete Casting

1. Casting of retaining walls and floor slabs is carried out immediately after fixingWaterstop RX in position.

2. Notify the Construction Manager 24 hours prior to placement of concrete atwaterstops.

3. Immediately prior to placing second pour, inspect waterstop for damage, discontinuity,premature swelling, and debris contamination. Replace damaged waterstop.Remove unacceptable waterstop from site and dispose of defective material inaccordance with local regulations.

4. Place concrete without displacing waterstop in position.5. Thoroughly and systematically vibrate concrete around waterstop to obtain

impervious, void-free concrete in vicinity of joint and to maximize intimate contactbetween concrete and waterstop. Do not allow vibrator to contact the strip waterstop.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 033000 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (FORMWORKS)

03 - CONCRETE


SECTION 033000 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

(FORMWORKS)

PART 1.0 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes:

1. Aluminum Formwork System2. Placement Procedures3. Finishes


1. Division 03 Concrete : Section: Cast-in-place; Concrete reinforcement, concretematerials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. (Refer to StructuralEngineer’s Structural Specification)

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's SPEC-DATA sheet, installationinstructions and technical bulletins for specified products.

B. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professionalengineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing, design, assembling anddisassembling aluminum formwork systems.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.


A. General: Comply with Division 01 Product Requirements section.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



03 - CONCRETE


PART 2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true,and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number ofjoints.

1. Manufacturer: KUMKANG INDUSTRIAL; KUMKANG ALU Form Systems or equal

a. Aluminum Form System: Aluminum A6061-T6

b. Components:1) Inner Wall Panel2) Slab Panel and Support3) Slab Corner and Beam4) Inside, Outside, Corner, Hunch5) Prop Heads, Middle Beams, End Beams, Joint Bars6) Accessories: Wall Tie, Round Pin, Wedge Pin

c. Normal Modules:1) Wall Panel: 600mm x 2450mm x t= 63.5mm2) Slab Panel: 600mm x 1200mm x t= 63.5mm

PART 3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to supportvertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, untilstructure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

1. Important note: The required lines and dimensions (esp. distance of finished concretecolumns to interior side of external reinforced concrete wall in office floors) shall bestrictly followed.

C. Do not chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining workthat is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



03 - CONCRETE


3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embeddeditems is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Before placing concrete, apply form oil on each panel as per manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that nonew concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams orplanes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction jointsas indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according toACI 301.

D. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.

E. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.

3.4 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to all concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or tobe covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

B. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete whereindicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concretesurfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing auniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by therubbing process.

2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency ofthick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to oneand one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Addwhite portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout willmatch adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. Whengrout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray forat least 36 hours.

3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one partportland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent andwater. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color ofdry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grindingsurface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformedsurfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matchingadjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformlyacross adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



03 - CONCRETE


3.5 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, andfinishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of6mm in one direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to receive concrete floor toppings and toreceive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is smallor inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granulartexture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete byhand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface isfree of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surfacedefects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramicor quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coatingsystem.

2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an

unleveled, freestanding, 3.00m long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed

anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3mm.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 033500 – CONCRETE FINISHING

03 - CONCRETE


SECTION 033500 – CONCRETE FINISHING

PART 1.0 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes:

1. Single application cure-seal-hardener for new concrete floors.2. Precautions for avoiding staining concrete before and after application


1. Division 01 Section "Sustainable Design Requirements" for additional LEEDrequirements.

2. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Division 03 Cast-In-Place Concrete sections.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM – American Society of Testing and Materials

1. ASTM C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical ConcreteSpecimens.

2. ASTM C779 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal ConcreteSurfaces.

3. ASTM C805 Standard Test Method for Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete.4. ASTM C1028 Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction

of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-MeterMethod.

5. ASTM D3359 Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.6. ASTM G23 Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) With

and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials (Withdrawn 2000).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's SPEC-DATA sheet, installationinstructions and technical bulletins for specified products.

B. Certificates: Manufacturer's certification that the installer is acceptable.

C. Maintenance Data: Maintenance instructions, including precautions for avoiding stainingafter application.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



03 - CONCRETE



A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by cure-seal hardener manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to installmanufacturer’s products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer’s willingnessto sell its product to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itselfconfer qualification on the buyer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain cure-seal hardener through one source from a singlemanufacturer.


A. General: Comply with Division 01 Product Requirements section.

B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers withidentification labels intact

C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmentalconditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Handling: Protect materials from dirt, corrosion, oil, grease and other contaminants.

PART 2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer 1: Curecrete Distribution, Inc.

Distributed by: TradeTek Resources Inc., Unit 205, Lapanday Centre Building, 2236 Pasong Tamo Ext., Makati City, Philippines

B. CURE-SEAL-HARDENER MATERIAL

1. Ashford Formula, a water-based chemically reactive penetrating sealer and hardenerthat seals by densifying concrete so that water molecules cannot pass through but airand water vapor can, and allows concrete to achieve full compressive strength,minimizing surface crazing and eliminating dusting.

a. Abrasion Resistance to Revolving Disks: At least a 32.5% improvement overuntreated samples when tested in accordance with ASTM C779.

b. Surface Adhesion: At least a 22% increase in adhesion for epoxy when testedin accordance with ASTM D3359.

c. Hardening: As follows when tested in accordance with ASTM C39:

1) a. After 7 Days: An increase of at least 40% over untreated samples.2) b. After 28 Days: An increase of at least 38% over untreated samples.

d. Coefficient of Friction: 0.86 dry, 0.69 wet when tested in accordance with ASTMC1028.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



03 - CONCRETE


e. Rebound Number: An increase of at least 13.3% over untreated samples whentested in accordance with ASTM C805.

f. Light Exposure Degradation: No evidence of adverse effects on treatedsamples when tested in accordance with ASTM G23.

C. Manufacturer 2: SIKA Floor CureHard 24

Distributed by SIKA Philippines Inc, Unit A&B 888 M. Alvarez Avenue, Talon, Las Pinas City

D. Manufacturer 3: MBT (Concrete Sealer)

PART 3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins,product catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions for installation.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared and are suitable forapplication of product.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect ofunsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving thebest result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Do not use frozen material. Thaw and agitate prior to use.

D. If construction equipment must be used for application, diaper all components that might dripoil, hydraulic fluid or other liquids.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. New Concrete: Apply cure-seal-hardener to new concrete as soon as the concrete is firmenough to work on after troweling; with colored concrete, wait a minimum of 30 days beforeapplication.

1. Spray on at rate of 200 ft2/gal (5 m2/L).2. Keep surface wet with cure-seal-hardener for a minimum soak-in period of 30 minutes

without allowing it to dry out or become slippery. In hot weather, slipperiness mayappear before the 30 minute time period has elapsed. If that occurs, apply additionalcure-seal-hardener as needed to keep the entire surface in a non-slippery state forthe first 15 minutes. For the remaining 15 minutes, mist the surface as needed with

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



03 - CONCRETE


water to keep the material in a non-slippery state. In hot weather conditions, follow manufacturer's special application procedures.

3. When the treated surface becomes slippery after this period, lightly mist with wateruntil slipperiness disappears.

4. Wait for surface to become slippery again, and then flush entire surface with water toremove all cure-seal-hardener residue.

5. Squeegee surface completely dry, flushing any remaining slippery areas until noresidue remains.

6. Wet vacuum or scrubbing machines can be used in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions to remove residue.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed floors for at least 3 months until chemical reaction process is complete.

1. Do not allow traffic on floors for 3 hours after application.2. Do not allow parking of vehicles on concrete slab.3. If vehicles must be temporarily parked on slab, place dropcloths under vehicles during

entire time parked.4. Do not allow pipe cutting using pipe cutting machinery on concrete slab.5. Do not allow temporary placement and storage of steel members on concrete slabs.6. Clean up spills immediately and spot-treat stains with degreaser or oil emulsifier.7. Clean floor regularly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 035300 - CONCRETE TOPPING

03 - CONCRETE


SECTION 035300

CONCRETE TOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Fine-aggregate concrete floor topping.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product test reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPINGS

A. Fine-Aggregate Concrete Floor Topping: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture asfollows

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days.2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 lb/cu. yd. (320 kg/cu. m).3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).4. Air Content: 5-1/2 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch

(38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-

mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished toppings to exceed 3

percent.7. Steel-Fiber Reinforcement: Add to concrete mixture, according to manufacturer's

written instructions, at a rate of 50 lb/cu. yd. (29.7 kg/cu. m).Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd. (0.90 kg/cu. m).

8. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers that may beincorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



03 - CONCRETE


a. Holcim Cement Philippines.b. Cemex Philippines.c. La Farge Semento Inc.

9. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3,000 psi (20.7 MPa) ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.2 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighingapproximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylenesheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,25 percent solids content, minimum.

2.3 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, aromatic polyurea witha Type A Shore durometer hardness range of 90 to 95 per ASTM D 2240.

B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.

D. Sand: ASTM C 404, fine aggregate passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.

E. Water: Potable.

F. Acrylic-Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

G. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type V, two-component epoxy resin, capable ofhumid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Existing Concrete: Remove existing surface treatments and deteriorated and unsoundconcrete. Mechanically abrade base slabs to produce a heavily scarified surface profile withan amplitude of 6mm.

1. Prepare and clean existing base slabs according to concrete floor toppingmanufacturer's written instructions. Fill voids, cracks, and cavities in base slabs.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



03 - CONCRETE


2. Saw cut contraction and construction joints in existing concrete to a depth of 13 mmand fill with semirigid joint filler.

3. To both sides of joint edges and at perimeter of existing base slab mechanicallyremove a 100-mm wide and 0- to 25-mm-deep, tapered wedge of concrete andretexture surface.

B. Install joint-filler strips where topping abuts vertical surfaces.

3.2 FLOOR TOPPING APPLICATION

A. Start floor topping application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.

B. Monolithic Floor Topping: After textured-float finish is applied to fresh concrete of baseslabs specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete," place concrete floor toppingwhile concrete is still plastic.

C. Deferred Floor Topping: Within 72 hours of placing base slabs, mix and scrub bondingslurry into dampened concrete to a thickness of 1.6 to 3 mm, without puddling. Place floortopping while slurry is still tacky.

D. Place concrete floor topping continuously in a single layer, tamping and consolidating toachieve tight contact with bonding surface. Do not permit cold joints or seams to developwithin pour strip.

1. Screed surface with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.2. Slope surfaces uniformly where indicated.3. Begin initial floating using bull floats to form a uniform and open-textured surface

plane free of humps or hollows.

E. Finishing: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats as soon as concrete floor toppingcan support equipment and operator. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.Repeat float passes and restraightening until concrete floor topping surface has a uniform,smooth, granular texture.

1. Hard Trowel Finish: After floating surface, apply first trowel finish and consolidateconcrete floor topping by power-driven trowel without allowing blisters to develop.Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is smooth and uniform intexture.

F. Construction Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane ofconcrete floor topping, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Coat face of construction joint with epoxy adhesive at locations where concrete floortopping is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete floor topping.

G. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints with power saws equipped withshatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 3mm wide joints into concrete floortopping when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and beforerandom contraction cracks develop.

1. Form joints in concrete floor topping over contraction joints in base slabs, unlessotherwise indicated.

2. Construct contraction joints for a combined depth equal to topping thickness and notless than one-fourth of base-slab thickness.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



03 - CONCRETE


3. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to one-half of concrete floor toppingthickness, but not less than 13 mm deep.

3.3 PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete floor topping from premature drying and excessivecold or hot temperatures.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete floor topping surfaces in hot,dry, or windy conditions before and during finishing operations. Apply according tomanufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying floortopping, but before float finishing.

C. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete floor topping. Cure by one or acombination of the following methods, according to concrete floor topping manufacturer'swritten instructions:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days.2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining

cover for curing concrete for not less than seven days.3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in two coats in continuous operations by power

spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare and clean contraction joints and install semirigid joint filler, according tomanufacturer's written instructions, once topping has fully cured.

B. Install semirigid joint filler full depth of contraction joints. Overfill joint and trim semirigid jointfiller flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.5 REPAIRS

A. Defective Topping: Repair and patch defective concrete floor topping areas, including areasthat have not bonded to concrete substrate.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 042000 – UNIT MASONRY

04 – MASONRY


SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Concrete masonry units (CMU's)

a. 150mm and 100mm thick Concrete Hollow Blocks.

1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agencyto perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to complywith specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength[, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content].

3. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 780 for compressive strength.

4. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019.



B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonryreinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of ConcreteReinforcement."[ Show elevations of reinforced walls.]


A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units includedata on material properties and material test reports substantiating compliance withrequirements.

B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar. Include description of type and proportions ofingredients.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



04 – MASONRY


1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification.Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 forwater retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to complywith compressive strength requirement.


A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals andto demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "QualityRequirements" for mockups.

1. Build sample panels for typical interior wall in sizes approximately 60 inches (1500mm)] long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by full thickness.

PART 2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of unitsto contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not useunits where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements forfire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, byequivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Regional Materials: CMUs shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project sitefrom aggregates[ and cement] that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well asmanufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.

1. Products: Jackbilt, Allied Concrete or equal

B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints,headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

C. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength as indicated in the Structural Plans.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



04 – MASONRY


2.3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS

A. General: Provide one of the following:

B. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification;and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive strength notless than CMUs.

C. Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with requirements inDivision 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete," and with reinforcing bars indicated.

D. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beamCMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout.

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime shall be extracted,harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weatherconstruction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar colorindicated.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Holcimb. Cemexc. La-Farge

F. Water: Potable.

2.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60(Grade 420).

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from [neoprene] [urethane] [or] [PVC].

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from [styrene-butadiene-rubber compound,complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805] [or] [PVC, complying with

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



04 – MASONRY


ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406] and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unlessotherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.2. Use [portland cement-lime] [or] [masonry cement] mortar unless otherwise indicated.3. For exterior masonry, use [portland cement-lime] [or] [masonry cement] mortar.4. For reinforced masonry, use [portland cement-lime] [or] [masonry cement] mortar.5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed

to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blendingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, [Proportion] [Property] Specification.Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use [Type M] [Type S].2. For reinforced masonry, use [Type S] [Type N].3. For mortar parge coats, use [Type S] [or] [Type N].4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls;

for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for otherapplications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

5. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.

PART 3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuouspattern or to fit adjoining construction.

3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform jointthicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, andoffsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, wherepossible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry inrunning bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal facedimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and otherSections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



04 – MASONRY


D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

E. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams,lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bedjoints.

2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on

footings.4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course

on footings where cells are not grouted.

3.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement aminimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and

parapet walls.3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall

openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings[ in addition tocontinuous reinforcement].

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

3.5 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structuralsteel or concrete to comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [1 inch (25 mm)] [2 inches (50mm)] wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwiseindicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and

36 inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



04 – MASONRY


3.6 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to supportreinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry asindicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout.Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction andcuring of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardenedsufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on themduring construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attainedenough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for groutplacement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests andinspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, asneeded to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply withspecified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: [Level 1] special inspections according to the "International Building Code."

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar.

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and ofgrades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portionthereof.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 forcompressive strength.

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according toASTM C 780.

G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



04 – MASONRY


3.8 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fillmaterial as fill is placed.

1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.

B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill,as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 051200 – STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

05 - METALS


SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes structural steel and grout.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 05 Section "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additionalrequirements for architecturally exposed structural steel.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code ofStandard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Refer to details indicated in the Structural Plans.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, fabricator, testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

D. Source quality-control reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality CertificationProgram and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303.2. AISC 360.3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: [ASTM A 992/A 992M] [ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345)].

B. Channels, Angles[, M] [, S]-Shapes: [ASTM A 36/A 36M] [ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50

(345)].

C. Plate and Bar: [ASTM A 36/A 36M] [ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345)].

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade [B] [C], structural tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hexsteel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; allwith plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible-washer type with plain finish.

B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy-hex

steel structural bolts[ or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined

ends]; ASTM A 563, Grade DH, (ASTM A 563M, Class 10S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts;and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490 (ASTM F 959M, Type 10.9), compressible-washer type with plain finish.

C. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M),Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH (ASTM A 563M,

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


Class 10S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: [Hot-dip zinc coating] [Mechanically deposited zinc coating] [Hot-dip or

mechanically deposited zinc coating].2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8),

compressible-washer type with [mechanically deposited zinc coating]

[mechanically deposited zinc coating, baked epoxy-coated] finish.

D. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1,

[heavy-hex] [round] head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends,heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: [Plain] [Mechanically deposited zinc coating].

E. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

F. Unheaded Anchor Rods: [ASTM F 1554, Grade 36] [ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable].

1. Configuration: [Straight] [Hooked].

2. Finish: [Plain] [Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C] [Mechanically

deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50].

G. Headed Anchor Rods: [ASTM F 1554, Grade 36] [ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable],straight.



H. Threaded Rods: [ASTM A 36/A 36M] [ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade B7].



I. [Clevises] [and] [Turnbuckles]: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108,Grade 1035.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and productrequirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for theTesting of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-ScaleEnvironmental Chambers."

B. Primer: Comply with Division 09 painting Sections and Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings."

C. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type I/ Type II, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.

D. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primercomplying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


2.4 GROUT

A. Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, metallic aggregategrout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallicaggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable forapplication and a 30-minute working time.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricateaccording to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" andAISC 360.

B. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shearconnectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according toAWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification forStructural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of jointspecified.

1. Joint Type: [Snug tightened] [Pretensioned] [Slip critical].

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, weldingprocedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embeddedmembers to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded.3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).5. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale andspatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications andstandards:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer'swritten instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry filmthickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints,corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency toperform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is beingfabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply withthe Contract Documents.

C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be[ tested and] inspected according toRCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will betested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspectionprocedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces andlocations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance withrequirements.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according toAISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface ofplates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.

3. [Snug-tighten] [Pretension] anchor rods after supported members have beenpositioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut offflush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.

Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure.[ Comply with

manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.]

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice forSteel Buildings and Bridges."

3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification forStructural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of jointspecified.

1. Joint Type: [Snug tightened] [Pretensioned] [Slip critical].

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M[ and AWS D1.8/D1.8M] for tolerances,appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used incorrecting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporaryconnections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to

inspect [field welds] [and] [high-strength bolted connections].

B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be[ tested and] inspected according to RCSC's"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according toAWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not beaccepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply withthe Contract Documents.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 055000 – METAL FABRICATIONS

05 - METALS


SECTION 055000

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Metal ladders.2. Metal floor plate and supports.3. Miscellaneous steel trim.4. Column guards (parking levels).5. Slip resistant abrasive metal treads.6. Stainless steel stair nosings.7. Loose bearing and leveling plates.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:

1. Loose steel lintels.2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts

indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete.


A. Delegated Design: Design ladders, including comprehensive engineering analysis by aqualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteriaindicated.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperaturechanges acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),material surfaces.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Metal nosings and treads.2. Paint products.3. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and theirconnections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

C. Samples: For each type and finish of extruded tread.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performancerequirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualifiedprofessional engineer responsible for their preparation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

D. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.

E. Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive material metallically bonded to steel.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the followingavailable products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limitedto, the following:

a. IKG Industries, a division of Harsco Corporation; Mebac.b. SlipNOT Metal Safety Flooring, a W. S. Molnar company; SlipNOT.c. Or approved equivalent.

F. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

H. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.

1. Size of Channels: 41mm x 41 mm2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, Grade 33

(Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating; 2.8-mm nominal thickness. 3. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 33

(Grade 230); 2.5-mm (12Ga) hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and acrylic-prime and .

I. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


2.3 NONFERROUS METALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.

B. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.

D. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze).

E. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400(leaded semired brass).

F. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickelbronze).

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterioruse and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941(ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.

B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwiseindicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron orASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dipgalvanized per ASTM F 2329.

C. Post-Installed Anchors: chemical anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply withASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwiseindicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1(A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594(ASTM F 836M).

D. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts)complying with MFMA-4 41 by 22 mm by length indicated with anchor straps or studs notless than 75 mm long at not more than 200 mm o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633,Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply Division 09 painting Sections and Division 09Section "High-Performance Coatings."

C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkydprimer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

D. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may beincorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Boysen

b. Dulux

E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 andcompatible with paints specified to be used over it.

F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseousgrout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended bymanufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges.Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength andcorrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fastenersor welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

E. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner toexclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrallywelded steel strap anchors not less than 600 mm o.c.

2.7 METAL LADDERS

A. General:

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated.2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.

B. Steel Ladders:

1. Space siderails 600mm apart unless otherwise indicated.2. Space siderails of elevator pit ladders 450mm apart.3. Siderails: Continuous, 12mm x 63mm stainless steel flat bars, with eased edges.4. Rungs: 25mm diameter stainless steel bars.5. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.6. Provide nonslip abrasive surfaces on top of each rung.

2.8 METAL FLOOR PLATE

A. Fabricate from abrasive-surface floor plate.

1. Thickness: 6 mm as indicated

B. Provide steel angle supports as indicated.

C. Provide flush stainless steel bar drop handles for lifting removable sections, one at each endof each section.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profilesshown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and useconcealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installationwith other work.

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.

D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with primer specified in Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings."

2.10 COLUMN GUARDS

A. Fabricate guards from 10mm thick x 100mm x 100mm x (height) steel (for indoor parkinggarage) and stainless steel Type 304 (loading dock and parking entry/ exit) as indicated inthe detailed Architect’s Drawings fit flat against column. Drill each end for two 19mm anchorbolts.

B. Prime column guards with zinc-rich primer (for steel).

C. Hairline finish for stainless steel column guards.

2.11 SLIP-RESISTANT ABRASIVE METAL TREADS

A. Slip resistant fabrication made from steel

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


1. Manufacturer: SlipNOT Stair Treads/ Covers or equal

2.12 STAINLESS STEEL STAIR NOSING

A. 50mm wide x 19mm x 3mm thick fluted angular fabrication made from stainless steel SUS304.

1. Manufacturer: TSUKITORA, ST250, distributed by GS GO Bros. or locally fabricatedstainless steel nosing by EJ Metals

B. Hairline finish

C. Provide stainless steel anchors spot welded to underside of stainless steel nosing forembedding in concrete.

2.13 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concreteconstruction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

2.14 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings andrecesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.

B. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

C. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.

2.15 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supportedfrom concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with nofewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.16 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" forrecommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.17 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M forsteel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to beembedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with primers specified in Division 09 painting Sections unless zinc-richprimer indicated.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,"Commercial Blast Cleaning” requirements indicated below:

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial

Blast Cleaning."3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Division 09 Section "High-

Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installingmetal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from establishedlines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections thatare not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping sizelimitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dipgalvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metalfabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,masonry, or similar construction.

3.2 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen toimprove bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing membershave been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shimsbut, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

C. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, andabraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shoppainting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repairgalvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 055213 – PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

05 - METALS


SECTION 055213

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Steel pipe and tube railings.2. Stainless-steel pipe and tube railings.3. Parking Safety Guard Rails


A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by aqualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteriaindicated.

B. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and thefollowing loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Parking Safety Guard Rails

a. 12,000 pounds load-tested (Extra-Heavy Duty)

3. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.(0.093 sq. m).

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulatingmetals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.



1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.2. Railing brackets.3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performancerequirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualifiedprofessional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualifiedtesting agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offeringproducts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:a. EJ Metals and Allied Products Inc.

2. Stainless-Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:

a. EJ Metals and Allied Products Inc.

2.2 METALS, GENERAL

A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finishas supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 STEEL AND IRON

A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed).

B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40),unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.4 STAINLESS STEEL

A. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

B. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304.

C. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.


A. Fasteners: Provide the following:

1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 orASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steelfasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.

3. Stainless-Steel Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capableof sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unitmasonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined bytesting according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloywelded.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and productrequirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for theTesting of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-ScaleEnvironmental Chambers."

E. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.

F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 andcompatible with paints specified to be used over it.

G. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections and Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings."

H. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkydprimer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

I. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.

J. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Cementitious galvanized metal primer complying withMPI#26.

K. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with primer and topcoat.

L. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat.

M. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

N. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseousgrout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended bymanufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


2.6 FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to aradius of approximately 1mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas onexposed surfaces.

B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittingsdesigned for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove flux immediately.4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoiningsurfaces.

D. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling or otherwise deformingexposed surfaces.

E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.

G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneousfittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwiseindicated.

2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanized Railings:

1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.2. Hot-dip galvanize indicated steel and iron railings, including hardware, after

fabrication.3. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.4. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.

B. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railingsof grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply withSSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

D. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwiseindicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

E. High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to prime-coated surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and withrequirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, andMaintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Apply at spreading rates recommendedby coating manufacturer.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.8 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. 120 to 150 grit (Hairline Finish)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established linesand levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated orfinished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical orother means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 2 mm in 1 m.3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 5 mm in 3 m.

B. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact withgrout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

C. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into preset metal pipe sleeves and grouting annularspace.

D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges.

E. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction.

F. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces.

G. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Use type ofbracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.

H. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields andhanger or lag bolts.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, andabraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used forshop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.



PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 055300 – METAL GRATINGS

05 - METALS


SECTION 055300

METAL GRATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal bar gratings.2. Metal frames and supports for gratings.


A. Delegated Design: Design gratings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by aqualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteriaindicated.

B. Structural Performance: Gratings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and thefollowing loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Floors: Uniform load of 125 lbf/sq. ft. (6.00 kN/sq. m) or concentrated load of 2000 lbf(8.90 kN), whichever produces the greater stress.

2. Floors: Uniform load of 250 lbf/sq. ft. (11.97 kN/sq. m) or concentrated load of 3000lbf (13.40 kN), whichever produces the greater stress.

3. Walkways and Elevated Platforms Other Than Exits: Uniform load of 60 lbf/sq. ft.(2.87 kN/sq. m).

4. Walkways and Elevated Platforms Used as Exits: Uniform load of 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79kN/sq. m).

5. Sidewalks and Vehicular Driveways, Subject to Trucking: Uniform load of 250 lbf/sq.ft. (11.97 kN/sq. m) or concentrated load of 8000 lbf (35.60 kN), whichever producesthe greater stress.

C. Seismic Performance: Provide gratings capable of withstanding the effects of earthquakemotions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.



1. Formed-metal plank gratings.2. Clips and anchorage devices for gratings.3. Paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performancerequirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualifiedprofessional engineer responsible for their preparation.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS



A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual “and NAAMM MBG 532, "Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FERROUS METALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half ofpreconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M orASTM A 1018/A 1018M.

D. Wire Rod for Bar Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).

E. Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205).

F. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33 (Grade 230),with G90 (Z275) coating.

G. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

H. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterioruse and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941(ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, andclass required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.2. Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.

B. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capableof sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unitmasonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined bytesting according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.



PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkydprimer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 andcompatible with paints specified to be used over it.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to aradius of approximately 1 mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas onexposed surfaces.

B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that neededto support indicated loads.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

D. Fabricate toeplates for attaching in the field.

2.5 METAL BAR GRATINGS

A. Pressure-Locked Steel Grating:

1. Bearing Bar Spacing: 11 or 13 mm o.c.2. Bearing Bar Depth: As required to comply with structural performance requirements.3. Bearing Bar Thickness: As required to comply with structural performance

requirements.4. Crossbar Spacing: 51 mm o.c.5. Traffic Surface: Plain.6. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 1.8 oz./sq. ft.

(550 g/sq. m) of coated surface.

B. Removable Grating Sections: Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entireperimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if notindicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports.

C. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange cutouts to permitgrating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings.

1. Edge-band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearing bars with bars ofsame size and material as bearing bars.

D. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation.

2.6 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS

A. Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars ofwelded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receivegratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units toreceive hardware and similar items.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from same basic metal as gratings.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


2. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrallywelded anchors. Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 600 mm o.c. and provideminimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 32 mm wide by 6 mm thick by 200mm long.

2.7 STEEL FINISHES

A. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly.

B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M forsteel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

C. Shop prime gratings, frames and supports unless otherwise indicated.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,"Commercial Blast Cleaning."

E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installinggratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured fromestablished lines and levels and free of rack.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

C. Attach toeplates to gratings by welding at locations indicated.

3.2 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS

A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar gratingstandards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installationclearances and standard anchoring details.

B. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fastenersindicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installationconditions shown.

C. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials aresame; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, andabraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shoppainting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS




PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 057000 – DECORATIVE METAL

05 - METALS


SECTION 057000

DECORATIVE METAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Stainless steel cut-out design ceiling panels.

2. Stainless steel inserts and reglets on stone facing works.


1. Division 09 Section "Stone Facing" for stone wall paneling, column facing works.

2. Division 08 Section “Plastic Glazing”, “Glazing”, “Decorative Glass Glazing”.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including finishing materials.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Indicate materials, finishes,fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.

C. Patterns and Models

D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STAINLESS STEEL

A. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304

B. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20.

C. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 304

D. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


E. Steel Sheet, Cold Rolled: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel or structuralsteel, exposed.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:1. Stainless-Steel Items: Stainless-steel fasteners.2. Steel Items: Plated steel fasteners with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25

electrodeposited zinc coating unless otherwise indicated. 3. Dissimilar Metals: Stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Provide square or hex socket flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unlessotherwise indicated.

C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion type or chemical type.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply withASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 unless otherwiseindicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1(A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594(ASTM F 836M).


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloywelded.


A. Form decorative metal to required shapes and sizes, true to line and level with true curvesand accurate angles and surfaces. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-definedlines and arris.

B. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Fabricate connections that willbe exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.

C. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding and brazing. Weld and brazebehind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposedwelded and brazed joints of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

1. Where welding and brazing cannot be concealed behind finished surfaces, finishjoints to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 Welds:no evidence of a welded joint

D. Provide castings that are sound and free of warp, cracks, blowholes, or other defects thatimpair strength or appearance. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to removeseams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS


2.5 DECORATIVE STAINLESS STEEL CEILING PANELS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturer offeringproducts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. EJ Metals and Allied Products Inc.

B. Fabricate decorative ceiling panels from stainless-steel sheet or plate of thickness, size, andpattern indicated.

1. Refer to detailed drawings of Architect (Reflected Ceiling Plans, Detailed CeilingSections of Main Lobby, Arcade, Toilets and Interior of Elevator Cabs).

2.6 DECORATIVE STAINLESS STEEL TRIMS/ INSERTS AND REGLETS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturer offeringproducts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. EJ Metals and Allied Products Inc.

B. Fabricate decorative ceiling panels from stainless-steel sheet or plate of thickness, size, andpattern indicated.

1. Refer to detailed drawings of Architect (Lobby Elevations showing stone wall facingpattern, Lobby Reception Counter Details showing stainless steel inserts ofDecorative Glass counter, and Interior Elevations of Elevator Cabs).

2.7 COMBINATION HALL PUSH-BUTTON STATIONS

A. Fabricate units of stainless steel to comply with details indicated. Coordinate withrequirements in Division 14 Section "Electric Traction Elevators" to provide integrated,closely fitted assemblies.

1. Fabricate faceplates from 3.2-mm thick sheet with edges beveled at a 45-degreeangle for one-half thickness of metal.

2. Provide units with rectangular, split-bowl trash receptacle, designed for recessmounting in nominal 100-mm wall depth.

3. Provide units with emergency pictorial signs and text, complying with requirements ofauthorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in fire emergency, elevators should notbe used and that stairways should be used instead. Engrave pictorial sign and textinto front surface of faceplates to a depth of 1.6 mm with engraving painted red.

4. Provide cutouts in faceplates of units for push buttons of elevator hall push-buttonstation, card reader, and elevator key switches.

2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL


B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,temporary protective covering before shipping.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



05 - METALS



A. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6. Hairline Finish

B. Manufacturer to submit actual sample for Architect’s approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where needed to secure decorative metal to in-place construction.

B. Set products accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from establishedlines and levels.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where indicated,uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers.

D. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return itemswith such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, orprovide new units as required.

E. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, and flashings as work progresses.

F. Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation.Remove protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other work.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 064023 – INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES


SECTION 064023

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Wood caseworks/ Solid wood-framed Mirrors.2. Plastic-laminate cabinets.3. Plastic-laminate countertops.4. Solid-surfacing-material countertops.5. Shop finishing of woodwork.

B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging stripsunless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.


A. Product Data: For solid-surfacing material, cabinet hardware and accessories and finishingmaterials and processes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scaledetails, attachment devices, and other components.

C. Samples:

1. Lumber and panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finishedon one side and one edge.

2. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, for each finish systemand color, with exposed surface finished.

3. Plastic-laminates, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.4. Thermoset decorative panels, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.5. Solid-surfacing materials.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork.

B. Quality Standard: A Fabricator who employs experienced casework installers who aretrained and approved for installation of caseworks required for this Project.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wetwork is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relativehumidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS

A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide interior architectural woodwork by one of the following:

1. DSL Manufacturing Ind. Corp.2. Dunwoody and Madison

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Narra

B. Wood Products:

1.2. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.3. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD

4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2

5. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.6. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1

C. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished withthermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.

D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, asrequired by woodwork quality standard.

E. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying withISSFA-2.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:a. Formica Corporation.b. Staron - Samsung; Cheil Industries Inc.c. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

F. Acrylic Diffuser: 6.0 mm thick .

G. Tempered Decorative Float Glass for Reception Counter Face:1. Glass Substrate prior to Glass Coating System application: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT,

Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3, with exposed edges seamed beforetempering, 6 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





2. Modified Polyurethane Glass Coating to Glass Substrate: to achieve finish andtranslucency as specified by Architecta. Manufacturer: Pacific Glass Corporation using Graphicote Glass Coating

Technology System

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply withperformance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use ExteriorType or Interior Type A. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed throughor otherwise adversely affect finishes. Kiln-dry material after treatment.

B. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels made from softwood particles and fire-retardantchemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 or lessand smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84.

C. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2 medium-density fiberboard panels made fromsoftwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time ofpanel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200or less per ASTM E 84.

2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architecturalwoodwork, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled byDescribing Products)."

B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- (2.4-mm-)thick metal, and as follows:

1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01361.2. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521.

C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100, 135, and 170degrees of opening, self-closing.

D. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.

E. Catches: Roller catches, BHMA A156.9, B03071 or Ball friction catches, BHMA A156.9,B03013.

F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension

type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides.2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 150 mm high and 600

mm wide.3. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-200; for drawers more than 150 mm high or 600 mm

wide.4. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 75 mm high 600 mm wide.

G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies withBHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Dark, Oxidized, Satin Bronze, Oil Rubbed: BHMA 613 for bronze base; BHMA 640 forsteel base; match Architect's sample.

2. Bright Brass, Clear Coated: BHMA 605 for brass base; BHMA 632 for steel base.3. Bright Chromium Plated: BHMA 625 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 651 for steel

base.4. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, fire-retardant-treated, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Adhesives, General: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.

C. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives: Installation adhesives hall have a VOC content of30 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site.Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Premium2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove

splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.3. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing"

and in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass withremovable stops.

B. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets:

1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: As indicated.2. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate as

follows:

a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS(1.2 mm thick).b. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. (1.0 mm thick)c. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGSd. Edges: Grade HGS PVC edge banding, 3 mm thick, matching laminate in

color, pattern, and finish.

3. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressuredecorative laminate, Grade VGS 0.7 mm thick

4. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.5. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood6. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Match sample of Architect7. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate

manufacturer's full range of wood grains, metallic, patterns and matte finish.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





C. Plastic-Laminate Countertops:

1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Match sample of Architect.3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate

manufacturer's full range of wood grains, metallic, patterns and matte 4. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces

D. Solid-Surfacing-Material Countertops:

1. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 19 mm.2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected from manufacturer's full range3. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes. Comply with solid-

surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers,fabrication, and finishing.

2.7 SHOP FINISHING

A. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, andpolishing until after installation.

B. Finishing Materials: Products shall comply with the testing and product requirements of theCalifornia Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of VolatileOrganic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealedsurfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling.

D. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium2. AWI Finish System: Acrylic lacquer3. Staining: Match approved sample for color.4. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply a wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from

closed-grain wood before staining and finishing.5. Open-Grain Woods: After staining (if any), apply paste wood filler to open-grain

woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.6. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per

ASTM D 523.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions ininstallation areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work asrequired, including removal of packing and backpriming.

B. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 3 mm in 2400 mm. Shimas required with concealed shims.

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damagedfinish at cuts.

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Securewith countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation.Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filledflush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and areaccurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provideunencumbered operation.

1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than400 mm o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 25-mm penetration into woodframing, blocking, or hanging strips, No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws throughmetal backing or metal framing behind wall finish or toggle bolts through metalbacking or metal framing behind wall finish].

G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or othersupports into underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall withsealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 071416 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING

07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION


SECTION 071416

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Latex-rubber waterproofing. (component of WP-1, WP-1A, WP-2 and WP-3: Liquid-applied waterproofing membrane)

B. Related Section: Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation.



B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substratejoints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins withadjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.




A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is approved or licensed by waterproofing manufacturerfor installation of waterproofing required for this Project.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate conditionand pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, specialdetails and flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, andprotection and repairs.


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substratetemperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing toa damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperaturesare less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above dew point.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which waterproofingmanufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace waterproofing that does not comply withrequirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LATEX-RUBBER WATERPROOFING

A. Two-Component, Reinforced, Latex-Rubber Waterproofing: Comply with ASTM C 836 and with manufacturer's written physical requirements.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may beincorporated into the Work include the following.

a. FinFlex distributed by Specserv

b. Formak 629 by Hitchins

c. SIKA Tite PUD

d. MBTech

2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Primer: Manufacturer's standard, factory-formulated polyurethane or epoxy primer.

B. Sheet Flashing: 50-mil- (1.3-mm-) minimum, nonstaining, uncured sheet neoprene.

1. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive.

C. Membrane-Reinforcing Fabric: Nonwoven, needle-punched white polyester fabric.

D. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric.

2.3 PROTECTION COURSE

A. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and asfollows:1. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm), nominal, for vertical applications; 1/4 inch (6 mm),

nominal, elsewhere.2. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended by waterproofing manufacturer

for type of protection course.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





2.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS

A. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured compositesubsurface drainage panels consisting of a woven-geotextile facing with an apparentopening size not exceeding No. 40 (0.43-mm) sieve, laminated to one side with a polymericfilm bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainagecore, with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm per ft. (35 L/min. per m).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Provideclean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or oversprayaffecting other construction.

C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration ofwaterproofing fluids.

D. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues,and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and othervoids.

F. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations throughwaterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 898 andASTM C 1471 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip inthe first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

G. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898 andASTM C 1471 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirtfrom joints and cracks, complying with ASTM D 4258, before coating surfaces.

H. Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where indicated or requiredaccording to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetratingsubstrate according to ASTM C 898.

3.2 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION

A. Apply waterproofing according to ASTM C 898 and ASTM C 1471 and manufacturer'swritten instructions.

B. Unreinforced Waterproofing Applications:

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free ofentrapped gases, with an average dry film thickness of 120 mils (3 mm).

C. Reinforced Waterproofing Applications:

1. Apply first coat of waterproofing, embed membrane-reinforcing fabric, and applysecond coat of waterproofing to completely saturate reinforcing fabric and to obtain aseamless reinforced membrane free of entrapped gases, with an average dry filmtotal thickness of 80 mils (2 mm)

D. Install protection course with butted joints over nominally cured membrane before startingsubsequent construction operations.

3.3 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall ordeck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives ormechanical fasteners that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextilefabric to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels duringsubsequent construction.

1. For vertical applications, install protection course before installing drainage panels.

3.4 CURING, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING

A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care toprevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing.

1. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.

B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and proceduresrecommended by manufacturer of affected construction.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 071616 – CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING



SECTION 071616

CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes crystalline waterproofing for negative-side application to concrete andconcrete unit masonry.




A. Product certificates.

B. Product test reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying crystalline waterproofing similar inmaterial, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted inapplications with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site


A. Proceed with waterproofing work only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts, drains, andother projections through the substrate to be waterproofed have been completed. Proceedonly after substrate defects, including honeycombs, voids, and cracks, have been repaired toprovide a sound substrate free of forming materials, including reveal inserts.

B. Ambient Conditions: Proceed with waterproofing work only if temperature is maintained at40 deg F (4.4 deg C) or above during work and cure period, and space is well ventilated andkept free of water.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS

A. Crystalline Waterproofing: Prepackaged, white colored proprietary blend of portland cement,specially treated sand, and active chemicals that, when mixed with water and applied,penetrates into concrete and concrete unit masonry and reacts chemically with thebyproducts of cement hydration in the presence of water to develop crystalline growth withinsubstrate capillaries to produce an impervious, dense, waterproof substrate; that has VOCcontent complying with limits of authorities having jurisdiction; with properties meeting orexceeding the criteria specified below.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may beincorporated into the Work include the following:

a. Xypex Chemical Corporation; Xypex.b. Formdex Plus; Hitchins.c. SIKA Top 105d. MBTech

2. Water Permeability: Maximum zero for water at 9 m when tested according toCE CRD-C 48.

3. Compressive Strength: Minimum 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days when testedaccording to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Patching Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious repair mortar, crack filler, or sealantrecommended by waterproofing manufacturer for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs,reveals, and other imperfections; compatible with substrate and other materials indicated;and VOC content complying with limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Plugging Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious compound with hydrophobic propertiesand recommended by waterproofing manufacturer; resistant to water and moisture but vaporpermeable for all standard applications (vertical, overhead, and horizontal surfaces notexposed to vehicular traffic); compatible with substrate and other materials indicated; andVOC content complying with limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.

D. Sand: ASTM C 144.

E. Polymer Admixture for Protective Topping: Polymer bonding agent and admixture designedto improve adhesion to prepared substrates and not to create a vapor barrier.

F. Water: Potable.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





2.3 MIXES

A. Crystalline Waterproofing: Add prepackaged dry ingredients to water according tomanufacturer's written instructions. Mix together with mechanical mixer or by hand torequired consistency.

B. Protective Topping: Measure, batch, and mix portland cement and sand in the proportion of1:3 and water gaged with a polymer admixture. Blend together with mechanical mixer torequired consistency.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect other work from damage caused by cleaning, preparation, and application ofwaterproofing. Provide temporary enclosure to confine spraying operation and to ensureadequate ambient temperatures and ventilation conditions for application.

B. Do not allow waterproofing, patching, and plugging materials to enter reveals or annularspaces intended for resilient sealants or gaskets, such as joint spaces between pipes andpipe sleeves.

C. Stop active water leaks with plugging compound according to waterproofing manufacturer'swritten instructions.

D. Repair damaged or unsatisfactory substrate with patching compound according tomanufacturer's written instructions.

E. Surface Preparation: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions toremove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, mortar spatter, grease, oils, paint, curingcompounds, and form-release agents to ensure that waterproofing bonds to surfaces.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions for application andcuring.

1. Saturate surface with water for several hours prior to application and maintain dampcondition until applying waterproofing. Remove standing water.

2. Apply waterproofing to surfaces indicated on Drawings.3. Number of Coats: One or two coats for a total thickness not exceeding 5mm,

coverage is a minimum of 2.5 kgs/m2.4. Application Method: Brush or Spray. Apply to ensure that each coat fills voids and is

in full contact with substrate or previous coat.5. Dampen surface between coats.

B. Final Coat Finish: Brushed or Spray Textured.

C. Curing: Moist-cure waterproofing for three (3) days immediately after final coat has set,followed by air drying, unless otherwise recommended in writing by manufacturer.

D. Waterproofing Treatment Extensions: Extend waterproofing treatment as follows:

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





1. Onto columns integral with treated walls.2. Onto interior nontreated walls intersecting exterior treated walls, for a distance of 600

mm for cast-in-place concrete and 1200 mm for masonry.3. Onto exterior walls and onto both exterior and interior columns, for a height of 300

mm, where floors, but not walls, are treated.4. Onto every substrate in areas indicated for treatment, including pipe trenches, pipe

chases, pits, sumps and similar offsets and features.

E. Protective Topping: Apply 50mm thick, protective topping over floor surfaces.


A. Inspection: Engage manufacturer's representative to inspect completed application andprovide a written report that application complies with manufacturer's written instructions.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 071700 – BENTONITE WATERPROOFING



SECTION 071700

BENTONITE WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bentonite waterproofing.

2. Trowel-grade sodium bentonite compound.



B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for interface with other work.


A. Material certificates.


C. Sample warranty.


A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Installer agreeto repair or replace components of bentonite waterproofing system that fail in materials orworkmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Seven (7) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GEOTEXTILE/BENTONITE SHEETS

A. Geotextile/Bentonite Waterproofing: Minimum of 1.0 lb/sq. ft. (5 kg/sq. m) of bentonite claygranules between two layers of geotextile polypropylene fabric, one woven and onenonwoven, needle punched and heat fused together.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. CETCO; Voltex DS.

2. Grab Tensile Strength: 95 lbf (422 N) according to ASTM D 4632.

2.2 COMPOSITE HDPE/BENTONITE MEMBRANE

A. Composite HDPE/Bentonite Membrane: Minimum 90-mil- (2.3-mm-) thick membrane consisting of a 12-mil- (0.5-mm-) thick, HDPE geomembrane liner bonded to a layer of bentonite clay granules 78 mils (1.9 mm) thick.


a. CETCO; Swelltite.

2. Puncture Resistance: 169 lbf (752 N) according to ASTM E 154.3. Vapor Permeance: 0.03 perms according to ASTM E 96.

B. Composite HDPE/Bentonite Membrane with Protective Facing: Minimum 170-mil- (4.3-mm-)thick membrane consisting of HDPE geomembrane liner bonded to a layer of bentonite claygranules and with a spun polypropylene facing.


a. CETCO


C. Composite HDPE/Bentonite-Polymer Membrane: Minimum 200-mil- (5-mm-) thickmembrane consisting of HDPE geomembrane liner bonded to a layer of bentonite-polymerclay granules.


a. CETCO; Volclay Ultraseal SP.

2. Puncture Resistance: 75 lbf (334 N) according to ASTM D 4833.3. Vapor Permeance: 0.005 perms according to ASTM E 96.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





D. Composite Saline/Alkaline HDPE/Bentonite Membrane: Minimum 150-mil- (3.8-mm-) thickmembrane consisting of a 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick, HDPE geomembrane liner bonded to alayer of bentonite clay granules.


a. CETCO.


2.3 COMPOSITE GEOTEXTILE-HDPE/BENTONITE MEMBRANE

A. Geotextile/Bentonite-Polymer Waterproofing: Minimum 250-mil- (6.4-mm-) thick membraneof bentonite-polymer clay granules between two layers of geotextile polypropylene fabric,one woven and one nonwoven, needle punched and heat fused together.


a. CETCO; Volclay Ultraseal BT.

2. Puncture Resistance: 75 lbf (334 N) according to ASTM D 4833.3. Vapor Permeance: 0.005 perms according to ASTM E 96.

2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Manufacturer's standard accessories recommended for intended use and compatible with bentonite waterproofing.

B. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners, and asfollows:

1. Thickness: 6 mm, nominal.2. Thickness: 3 mm, nominal, for vertical applications; 6 mm, nominal, elsewhere.

C. Geotextile Protection Course: As recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

D. Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Comply with Division 33 Section "Subdrainage."

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Prepare substrates to be waterproofed, install waterproofing and accessories, and protectwaterproofing from damage and wetting according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install protection course before backfilling or placing overburden when recommended bywaterproofing manufacturer.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





3.2 GEOTEXTILE/BENTONITE SHEET INSTALLATION

A. Install a continuous layer of waterproofing sheets directly against concrete to bewaterproofed. Lap ends and edges a minimum of 100mm on horizontal and verticalsubstrates. Stagger end joints between sheets a minimum of 600 mm. Fasten seams bystapling to adjacent sheet or nailing to substrate.

3.3 COMPOSITE HDPE/BENTONITE MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install a continuous layer of waterproofing membrane with ends and edges lapped aminimum of 75 mm. Stagger end joints between membranes. Seal joints with permanentseam tape.

3.4 COMPOSITE GEOTEXTILE-HDPE/BENTONITE MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install a continuous layer of waterproofing membrane with ends and edges lapped aminimum of 75 mm. Stagger end joints between membranes. Seal joints with permanentseam tape.

3.5 PROPERTY LINE CONSTRUCTION

A. Voltex DS is used to waterproof various types of property line construction, including metalsheet piling, secant and contiguous piling, skin wall, shotcrete and stabilized-earth retentionwalls. Shotcrete can be applied directly against Voltex DS. Concrete surfaces shall be free oflarge voids or projections. Voids, pits, and cracks in excess of 20mm, shall be parged toflush condition using cement grout, Volclay Bentoseal or Volclay paste (granules & water).Projections greater than 20 mm shall be removed or smoothed flush. Generally, gradualundulating surfaces are acceptable, sudden changes in level, i.e. ridges and hollows, arenot. When working against property line, always start with the vertical installation, prior toinstalling Voltex DS under slab. Apply the bottom run of Voltex DS lengthways/horizontallyagainst the property line, approximately 1,100 mm from the substrate/blinding level, allowing150 mm of Voltex DS to extend under slab. On profiled property line (metal sheet piling,secant and contiguous piling, etc) the 150mm base ‘flap’ will need to be cut and splayed asnecessary, to allow the material to lay flat. Using CETCO’s proprietary shot-fired ‘soft-washer’ fasteners, and following general application guidelines for lapping all adjacent edges100 mm, and staggering adjacent roll ends no less than 300mm (avoiding four-way laps),and additionally ensuring that laps face downwards, as applicable, ensure that Voltex DSclosely contours the application surface. For secant piling, locate fixings close to cleavages.On contiguous piling, ensure that soil columns between piles are cut back to no less thanone third of the pile diameter, to create a fixing cleavage, and reduce the likelihood of soildislodging behind the membrane.

3.6 UNDER CONCRETE FLOOR SLABS

A. Voltex DS is recommended for use under structural reinforced concrete slabs 150 mm thick,or greater, over a compacted earth/gravel substrate, or 50 mm lean-mix concrete, InstallVoltex DS around all foundations (ground beams pads, pile caps etc). Place Voltex DS overthe properly prepared substrate with the dark grey (woven) geotextile side facing theconcrete to be waterproofed. Overlap all adjoining edges a minimum 100 mm and staggerends a minimum 300 mm. Staple or nail edges together as required to prevent anydisplacement before and during concrete placement.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





B. Voltex DS should not extend into foundation bearing planes (i.e. pile caps, ground beams,pads etc.,) but should completely envelop them. Where this is not possible / desirable,VolSeal 20 (cementitious waterproofing by crystallization) or similar can be used as acontinuity ‘membrane’ through the bearing plane, to which Voltex DS can be sealed using a100 mm lap, incorporating a 5 mm X 50 mm fillet of Bentoseal. Cut Voltex DS to provide asnug fit around all applicable penetrations (pipes, piles etc). Detail all penetrations with a 40mm fillet of Bentoseal or Volclay Paste (granules & water) around the penetration on top ofthe Voltex DS. Where concrete underblinding is not used, detail an additional 50 mm chasefilled with Volclay Granules around the penetration under the Voltex DS.

C. Where property line construction, such as secant / contiguous piling, metal sheet piling, skinwall etc., is used as the outside concrete form, continue the underslab Voltex DS installationup the property line a minimum 250 mm above the top edge of the finished floor slabfoundation, or kicker level. The extra 250 mm is very important since there is no access tothe outer edge after the concrete pour, and the top 100 mm needs to be kept free ofconcrete splashes to enable a clean lap later.

3.7 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Substrate should be smooth and Compacted to a minimum of 85% Modified Proctor density.Concrete surfaces should be free of voids and sharp projections. Surface irregularitiesshould be removed before installation. Honeycombing and other surface voids must be filledwith mortar or Bentoseal, and tie-bolt holes must be filled with proprietary non-shrinkmortar/grout.

3.8 LIMITATIONS

A. Horizontal installation surfaces shall be free of excessive* standing water, particularly whereconcrete underblinding is not utilized. (*Voltex DS can be installed in almost all inclementweather conditions, providing the quality/accuracy of the installation is not affected eg VoltexDS floating, Waterstop RX submersed, etc). If ground water contains strong acids, alkalis, oris of a conductivity of 2,500 umhos or greater, submit water samples to the manufacturer forcompatibility testing. If contaminated ground-water or saltwater conditions exist, pleasecontact manufacturer.

B. Voltex DS is not designed for unconfined aboveground waterproofing applications or below-ground masonry block foundation walls. Voltex DS is engineered for use under reinforcedstructural concrete slabs of 150 mm thick or greater. Do not install Voltex DS in horizontalsplit-slab, plaza deck and roof applications that will receive a poured concrete wear surfaceor other solid topping.

3.9 STORAGE

A. Store Voltex DS and all accessory products in a dry shelter. If stored protect with cover on allsides and top. Block up or pallet materials to prevent contact with ground surface water.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 072100 – THERMAL INSULATION



SECTION 072100

THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Foam-plastic board insulation (Extruded polystyrene roof deck insulation).

2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation





B. Research/evaluation reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, with maximum flame-spread andsmoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturersoffering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:

a. Owens Corning (Foamular 150)b. Styro Tech (Styro Flex EPS).

2. Compressive strength : 300 kN/m2

3. Thermal resistance: 5.0 at 75°F, 5.4 at 40°F mean temperature per 25mm thickness(hr x ft2 x °F/Btu)

4. Density : Minimum of 32 kg/m3

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





5. Edge profile : Shiplap

2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION


1. CertainTeed Corporation.2. CSR by Philippine Insulation3. Owens Corning.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spreadand smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passingASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

C. Polypropylene-Scrim-Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II(non-reflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less);Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier).

D. Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II (non-reflective faced),Class C (faced surface not rated for flame propagation); Category 1 (membrane is a vaporbarrier).

E. Reinforced-Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflectivefaced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1(membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrimpolyethylene.

F. Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced), Class B(faced surface with a flame-propagation resistance of 0.12 W/sq. cm); Category 1(membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrimpolyethylene.

G. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sizedto fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated atticspaces and vented eaves.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products andapplications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed toice, rain, or snow at any time.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly aroundobstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standardthicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thicknessindicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE SUBSTRATES

A. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-typeinsulation anchors as follows:

1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesiveaccording to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according toinsulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, andapplication indicated.

2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated betweenconcrete substrate and insulation.

3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into positionover spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, takingcare not to compress insulation below indicated thickness.

4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply cappedwashers to tips of spindles.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 076100 – SHEET METAL ROOFING

07 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION


SECTION 076100

SHEET METAL ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal roofing


A. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.



B. Shop Drawings: Show installation layout of sheet metal roofing, including plans, elevations,expansion joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembledwork.

1. Include details for forming, joining, and securing sheet metal roofing, including patternof seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints, roof penetrations, edgeconditions, special conditions, connections to adjoining work, and details of accessoryitems.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified.


A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans drawn to scale with coordinated details for penetrationsand roof-mounted items.

B. Portable Roll-Forming Equipment Certificate: Issued by UL for equipment manufacturer'sportable roll-forming equipment capable of producing panels that comply with ULrequirements.

C. Product test reports.

D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.


A. Roll-Formed Sheet Metal Roofing Fabricator Qualifications: Fabricator authorized byportable roll-forming equipment manufacturer to fabricate and install sheet metal roofingunits required for this Project, and who maintains current UL certification of its portable roll-forming equipment.

B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-formingequipment capable of producing roofing panels for sheet metal roofing assemblies thatcomply with UL 580 for Class 90 wind-uplift resistance. Maintain UL certification of portableroll-forming equipment for duration of sheet metal roofing work.

C. Sheet Metal Roofing Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and todemonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical roof area and eave[, including fascia,] [and soffit] as shown on

Drawings; approximately [48 inches (1200 mm)] square by full thickness, including

attachments[, underlayment,] and accessories.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Warranty form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace componentsof sheet metal roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within Two (2) years from date ofSubstantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agreesto repair finish or replace sheet metal roofing that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOFING SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage byapplying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dipprocess and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coatingdesignation; structural quality.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coatingdesignation, Grade 40 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275); structuralquality.

3. Thickness: Nominal 0.5mm thick 24Ga unless otherwise indicated.

4. Surface: Smooth, flat5. Factory Prime Coating: Where painting after installation is indicated, pretreat with

white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat; minimum dry filmthickness of 0.2 mil (0.005 mm).

6. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:a. Siliconized Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel

topcoat.

7. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

8. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturersoffering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:a. DN Steelb. Puyat Steel


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofing

system and as recommended by primary sheet metal[ or portable roll-forming equipment]manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular-threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivetsand bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.

1. General:

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal roofing using plasticcaps or factory-applied coating.

b. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws,gasketed, with hex-washer head.

c. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable formetal being fastened.

2. Fasteners for [Zinc-Coated] Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according toASTM A 153/A 153M, ASTM F 2329, or Series 300 stainless steel.

3. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.4. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze, or Series 300 stainless steel.5. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Solder:

1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.

2. For Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead.3. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of type recommended

by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compoundsealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant[ as recommended by

portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer for installation indicated]; low modulus;of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal roofingand remain watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limitedmovement.

G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide components required for a complete sheet metal roofingassembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets,fillers, metal closures, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of sheetmetal roofing unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide accessories as recommended by portable roll-forming equipmentmanufacturer to produce sheet metal roofing assemblies that comply with UL 580 forwind-uplift resistance classification specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

2. Cleats: For mechanically seaming into joints and formed from the following materials:

B. Roof Curbs: Fabricated from same material and finish as sheet metal roofing, minimum

thickness [matching the sheet metal roofing] <Insert thickness>; with bottom of skirtprofiled to match roof panel profiles; with weatherproof top box and integral full-length

cricket. Fabricate curb subframing of nominal [0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-)] <Insert thickness>thick, angle-, C-, or Z-shaped galvanized steel or stainless-steel sheet. Fabricate curb andsubframing to withstand indicated loads of size and height indicated. Coordinate dimensionswith rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

1. Insulate curbs with [1-inch- (25-mm-)] <Insert thickness> thick, rigid insulation.2. Install wood nailers at tops of curbs.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal roofing to comply with details shown and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions (panel width and seam height), geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of installation indicated. Fabricate sheet metal roofing and accessories at the shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Flat-Seam Roofing: Form flat-seam panels from metal sheets 20 by 28 inches (510by 710 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) notched and folded edges.

2. Standing-Seam Roofing: Form standing-seam panels with finished seam height [of 1

inch (25 mm)] [of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [as indicated] <Insert dimension>.

3. Batten-Seam Roofing: Form batten-seam panels with sides turned up [2-1/8 inches

(54 mm)] [as indicated] <Insert dimension> with 1/2-inch (13-mm) flange turnedtoward center of pan.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





B. General: Fabricate roll-formed sheet metal roofing panels with UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing roofing panels for sheet metal roofing assembliesthat comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift resistance classification specified in "QualityAssurance" Article. Fabricate roll-formed sheet metal according to equipmentmanufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown.

C. Form exposed sheet metal work to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, andtool marks; true to line and levels indicated; and with exposed edges folded back to formhems.

1. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments,integral flashings, and other components of metal roofing to profiles, patterns, anddrainage arrangements shown on Drawings and as required for leakproofconstruction.

D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanicaction by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying self-adhering sheetunderlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommendedby fabricator of sheet metal roofing or manufacturers of the metals in contact.

E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Custom fabricate flashings and trim to comply withrecommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design,dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Obtain field measurementsfor accurate fit before shop fabrication.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing orblocking and that tops of fasteners are flush with surface.

B. Lay out and [nail battens to wood sheathing] [screw battens to wood sheathing] [screw

battens to metal deck] before installation of sheet metal roofing.

1. Space fasteners not more than [18 inches (457 mm)] <Insert dimension> o.c.2. Space fasteners as required by portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer for

specified UL classification for wind-uplift resistance.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal roofing and other components of the Work securely in place,with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Install fasteners, solder, welding rods,protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for acomplete roofing system and as recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofing.

1. Field cutting of sheet metal roofing by torch is not permitted.

2. Provide metal closures at [peaks] [rake edges] [rake walls] [eaves] [and] each side

of ridge[ and hip] caps.3. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with closure strips at eaves, rakes, and perimeter

of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Predrillpanels for fasteners.

5. Install ridge[ and hip] caps as sheet metal roofing work proceeds.6. Locate roofing splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger roofing

splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.7. Install sealant tape where indicated.8. Lap metal flashing over sheet metal roofing to allow moisture to run over and off the

material.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, byapplying self-adhering sheet underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanentseparation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Coat back side of [uncoated aluminum] [and] [stainless-steel] sheet metal roofingwith bituminous coating where roofing will contact wood, ferrous metal, orcementitious construction.

C. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate tominimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tightinstallation.

3.3 CUSTOM-FABRICATED SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Formexposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks,considering temper and reflectivity of metal. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimumexposure of solder, welds, and sealant. Fold back sheet metal to form a hem on concealedside of exposed edges unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install cleats to hold sheet metal panels in position. Attach each cleat with twofasteners to prevent rotation.

2. Fasten cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. Bend tabs over fastener head.3. Provide expansion-type cleats and clips for roof panels that exceed 30 feet (9.1 m) in

length.

B. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. For roofing with 3:12slopes or less, use cleats at transverse seams. Prepare joints and apply sealants to complywith requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

C. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tinedges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), except reduce pre-tinningwhere pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.

1. Do not solder [metallic-coated steel] [and] [aluminum] sheet.2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into

joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposedsurfaces.

3. Stainless-Steel Roofing: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainlesssteel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning andsoldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaningand neutralization.

4. Copper Roofing: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets, using solder for copper.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





3.4 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mountingand provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and othercomponents.

1. Install components required for a complete sheet metal roofing assembly includingtrim, copings, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, metal closures,closure strips, and similar items.

2. Install accessories integral to sheet metal roofing that are specified in Division 07Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" to comply with that Section's requirements.

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's writteninstallation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provideconcealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Installwork with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation andweathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal roofing isinstalled unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 078413 – PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING



SECTION 078413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.



B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and designdesignation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspectingagency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submitillustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestoppingmanufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.


A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed incompliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.



A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according toFM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found tocomply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the followingrequirements:

1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by UL or FM Global.2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in

"Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems bearing marking of qualifiedtesting and inspection agency.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:

1. Hilti, Inc.2. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.3. SIKA.

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fireaccording to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintainoriginal fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systemsshall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and withpenetrating items if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 orUL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479,based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).

1. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructionspenetrated.

2. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructionspenetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determinedper UL 1479.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetrationopening at 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

F. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with thefollowing limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPAMethod 24):

1. Sealants: 250 g/L.2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

G. Low-Emitting Materials: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall complywith the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various SourcesUsing Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





H. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are neededto install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specifiedby penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspectingagency for firestopping indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirementsfor opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affectingperformance of the Work.

B. Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructionsand published drawings for products and applications indicated.

C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materialsduring their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes anddepths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustibleforming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components offirestopping.

D. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, andpenetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings andpenetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to producesmooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labelspermanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of firestopping edge solabels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Usemechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanentlybonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information onlabels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify BuildingManagement of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.4. Date of installation.5. Manufacturer's name.6. Installer's name.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :






A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because oftesting, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspectionreports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

3.4 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "FireResistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

B. Where FM Global-approved systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers listed in FMGlobal's "Building Materials Approval Guide" under "Wall and Floor Penetration Fire Stops."

C. Firestopping with No Penetrating Items:

1. UL-Classified Systems:

2. FM Global-Approved Systems:

D. Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing:



E. Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing:



F. Firestopping for Electrical Cables:

1. UL-Classified Systems

2. FM Global-Approved Systems

G. Firestopping for Cable Trays with Electric Cables:



H. Firestopping for Insulated Pipes:



I. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants:



PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





J. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants:



K. Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants:




PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 078446 – FIRE-RESITIVE JOINT SYSTEMS



SECTION 078446

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.2. Joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections.3. Joints in smoke barriers.



B. Product Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and designdesignation of qualified testing agency.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency'sillustration for a particular fire-resistive joint system condition, submit illustration, withmodifications marked, approved by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-ratedassembly.


A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating fire-resistive joint systems have been installedin compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.



A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according toFM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found tocomply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Fire-resistive joint systems shall comply with thefollowing requirements:

1. Fire-resistive joint system tests are performed by UL, Intertek ETL SEMKO and aqualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resistspread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and othergases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate buildingmovements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.

B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079:

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of construction they will join.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offeringproducts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, thefollowing:

a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.b. CEMCO.c. Fire Trak Corp.d. Grace Construction Products.e. Hilti, Inc.f. Johns Manville.g. Nelson Firestop Products.h. NUCO Inc.i. Passive Fire Protection Partners.j. RectorSeal Corporation.k. Specified Technologies Inc.l. 3M Fire Protection Products.m. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.n. USG Corporation.

C. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Rating determined by ASTM E 119based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa) orASTM E 2307.

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floorassembly.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following or available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporatedinto the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:a. Hilti, Inc.b. 3M Fire Protection Products.c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.d. USG Corporation.

D. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Ratings determined per UL 2079.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft (0.00775 cu. m/s x m) of joint at 0.30 inch wg(74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated intothe Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





a. Hilti, Inc.b. 3M Fire Protection Products.c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.d. USG Corporation.

E. Exposed Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

F. VOC Content: Fire-resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the following limits forVOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

G. Low-Emitting Materials: Fire-resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the testing andproduct requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice forthe Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-ScaleEnvironmental Chambers."

H. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers andforming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required.Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved bythe qualified testing agency for systems indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirementsfor joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installationinstructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materialsduring their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes anddepths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustibleforming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components offire-resistive joint system.

D. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce thefollowing results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achievefire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labelspermanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of joint edge so labels willbe visible to anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical fastenersor self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels tosurfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Fire-Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify BuildingManagement of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.3. Designation of applicable testing agency.4. Date of installation.5. Manufacturer's name.6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests andinspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due totesting, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only afterinspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

3.4 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "FireResistance Directory" under product Category XHBN or Category XHDG.

B. Where Intertek ETL SEMKO-listed systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers inIntertek ETL SEMKO's "Directory of Listed Building Products" under product categoryFirestop Systems.

C. Floor-to-Floor, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:

1. UL-Classified Systems: FF-[D] [S] [0000-0999] [1000-1999] [2000-2999] [3000-3999][4000-4999].

D. Wall-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:

1. UL-Classified Systems: WW-[D] [S] [0000-0999] [1000-1999] [2000-2999] [3000-3999] [4000-4999].

E. Floor-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:

1. UL-Classified Systems: FW-[D] [S] [0000-0999] [1000-1999] [2000-2999] [3000-3999][4000-4999].

F. Head-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





1. UL-Classified Systems: HW-[D] [S] [0000-0999] [1000-1999] [2000-2999] [3000-3999] [4000-4999].

2. Intertek ETL SEMKO-Listed Systems:.

G. Bottom-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:

1. UL-Classified Systems: BW-[D] [S] [0000-0999] [1000-1999] [2000-2999] [3000-3999][4000-4999].

H. Wall-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems Intended for Use as Corner Guards:

1. UL-Classified Systems: CG-[D] [S] [0000-0999] [1000-1999] [2000-2999] [3000-3999][4000-4999].

I. Perimeter Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:

1. UL-Classified Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems: CW-[D] [S] [0000-0999] [1000-1999] [2000-2999].

2. Intertek ETL SEMKO-Listed, Perimeter Fire-Barrier Systems:


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 079200 – JOINT SEALANTS



SECTION 079200

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants.2. Urethane joint sealants.3. Latex joint sealants.4. Preformed joint sealants.5. Acoustical joint sealants.


A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturerseight (8) samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. Use ASTM C 1087and manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specificjoint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealantsto joint substrates.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesionto Project joint substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied SealantJoint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, inASTM C 1521.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.3. Joint-sealant formulation.4. Joint-sealant color.



B. Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion test reports.

C. Preconstruction field-adhesion test reports.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





D. Field-adhesion test reports.

E. Warranties.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testingindicated.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repairor replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirementsspecified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealantmanufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not complywith performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warrantyperiod.

1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside theweatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content whencalculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicatedfor each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for jointsthat will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergonetesting according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionizedwater, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining toporous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come inrepeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

E. Refer to Architectural Outline Specifications Division 07 Section 079200.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant ASTM C 920.1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dow

Corning; Dow Corning 791 Silicone Building Sealant SS#1, Dow Corning 790(Masonry Sealant) SS#2, Dow Corning 786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant SS#3or comparable product by one of the following:

a. BASF Building Systems.b. Dow Corning Corporation.c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones.d. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division.e. Tremco Incorporated.

2. Type: Single component3. Grade: [nonsag (NS).4. Class: 100/505. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT).

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane Joint Sealant US#1: ASTM C 920.1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MBT;

Sonoclastic Ultra or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Bostik, Inc.b. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division.c. Tremco Incorporated.

2. Type: Single Component (S)3. Grade: nonsag (NS).4. Class: 255. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic (T)

2.4 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft.(160 kg/cu. m) and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce inprecompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side witha pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provideTremco; illmod 600 PS#1

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant:Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latexsealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne soundtransmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstratedby testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provideTremco Acoustical Sealant AS#1

2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surfaceskin and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producingoptimum sealant performance.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealantmanufacturer.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesionof sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers ofsealants and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants andsurfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants tocomply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that

do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesionof joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer oras indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Applyprimer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers toareas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primerwith adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by suchcontact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tapeimmediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use ofjoint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and atposition required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relativeto joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used betweensealants and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same timebackings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning orcuring begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below toform smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and toensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do

not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated.

F. Acoustical Sealant Installation: Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's writtenrecommendations.

G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses bymethods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealantsand of products in which joints occur.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform Ten (10) tests for the first 300 m of joint length for each kind of sealantand joint substrate.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant JointHand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, inASTM C 1521.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure fromtesting or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with otherrequirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply withindicated requirements.

3.4 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces JS-#>1.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints in brick pavers.b. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.c. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete paving units.d. Joints in stone paving units including steps .e. Tile control and expansion joints.f. Joints between different materials listed above.g. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane.

3. Joint Sealant: US#14. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces JS-#2.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring.c. Control and expansion joints in brick flooring.d. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.e. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane.3. Joint Sealant: US#14. Joint-Sealant Color:. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic

surfaces[ JS-#3].

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.c. Tile control and expansion joints.d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of [interior unit masonry] [concrete] [walls]

[and] [partitions].e. Joints on underside of plant-precast structural concrete [beams] [and] [planks].f. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of [interior doors]

[windows] [and] [elevator entrances].g. <Insert other joints>.h. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone3. Joint Sealant: SS#1

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





4. Joint-Sealant Color:

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontalnontraffic surfaces JS-#4

1. Joint Sealant Location:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone.3. Joint Sealant: SS#3.4. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontalnontraffic surfaces JS-#5.

1. Joint Location:

a. Acoustical joints where indicated.b. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Acoustical.3. Joint Sealant: AS#14. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 081113 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 - OPENINGS


SECTION 081113

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.



B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses,preparations for hardware, and other details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.

E. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbersfor details and openings as those on Drawings.


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed andlabeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing atpositive pressure according to NFPA 252, UBC Standard 7-2 or UL 10C.

1. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, providedoors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 thatare listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 orUL 9. Label each individual glazed lite.

C. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. LEC Steel Manufacturing.2. Metrotech.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS, Type B.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; withminimum A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying withASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according toASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 102 mm, as measured according toASTM C 143/C 143M.

G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I.

H. Glazing: Division 08 Section "Glazing."

I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat.

2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Design: Flush panel2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,

polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.

a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-riseratings indicated.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard.4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick,

end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.5. Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and

Frames."

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from stainless steel sheet. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless)

C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated(stainless steel) sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicatedbelow by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 forphysical performance level:

1. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C (Standard Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).

a. Width: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm)

b. For Standard Duty doors (1-HR FR)2. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless)

a. For 2-HR FR Doors

D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.

2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from stainless steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.3. Frames for Level 1 Steel Doors: 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick steel sheet.4. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.5. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.6. Frames for Level 4 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- (1.7-mm-) thick steel sheet.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet isindicated.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.3. Fabricate knocked-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions.4. Frames for Level 1 Steel Doors: 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick steel sheet.5. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.6. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.7. Frames for Level 4 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- (1.7-mm-) thick steel sheet.

8. Frames for Wood Doors: [0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-)] [0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-)] [0.067-

inch- (1.7-mm-)] thick steel sheet.9. Frames for Borrowed Lights: Same as adjacent door frame.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size,not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not lessthan 2 inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not lessthan 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm)thick, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,

allowing not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of framesat finish floor surface.

2.6 HOLLOW METAL PANELS

A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified foradjoining hollow metal work.

2.7 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, same material asdoor face sheet.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch(16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, same materialas frames.

D. Terminated Stops: Where indicated, terminate stops 6 inches (152 mm) above finish floor

with a [45] [90]-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Coveropening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth andflush with frame.

2.8 LOUVERS

A. Provide sightproof louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C,with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- (0.5-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick steel frame.

1. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Movable blades closed by actuating fusible link, andlisted and labeled for use in fire-rated door assemblies of type and fire-resistancerating indicated.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


2.9 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanicalanchors.

B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- (6.4-mm-thick by 25.4-mm-) wide steel.

C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm)thick.

2.10 FABRICATION

A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

B. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal jointsin top edges of doors against water penetration.

2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required

by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated.

C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates orangles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and makesmooth, flush, and invisible.

2. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams orjoints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossingsand to jambs by butt welding.

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposedfasteners unless otherwise indicated.

4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to begrouted.

5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spotwelds per anchor.

6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from topand bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c.and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high.4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive doorsilencers.

a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers.b. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortisedhardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified inDivision 08 Section "Door Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted

door hardware.3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with

Division 26 electrical Sections.

E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Formcorners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side ofhollow metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that eachglazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interiordoors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and

type of installation indicated.

2.11 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely untilpermanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporarybraces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposedfaces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have

been properly set and secured.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed.Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with groutcontaining antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead ofpostinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on ShopDrawings.

3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling spacebetween frames and masonry with grout.

4. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Takeprecautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed ordamaged by grout forces.

5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalledexpansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, andinvisible on exposed faces.

6. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalledexpansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and filland make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overheadstructural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry orto other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contactfor securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or boltedanchorage to frame jamb members.

8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on aline 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on ahorizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners ofjambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specifiedbelow. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6

mm).c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum

3/4 inch (19 mm).

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and withhollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformlynot more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. fromeach corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before finalinspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replacedefective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwiseunacceptable.

B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas ofprime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 081119 – STAINLESS STEEL DOORS

08 - OPENINGS


SECTION 081119

STAINLESS STEEL DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Stainless-steel, hollow-metal doors and panels2. Stainless-steel, hollow-metal frames.



B. Shop Drawings: For stainless-steel doors and frames. Include elevations, details, anchorages and accessories.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.

D. Schedule: Provide a schedule of stainless-steel, hollow-metal work using same referencenumbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed andlabeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing atpositive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, providedoors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: At corridors, smoke barriers, and smokepartitions, provide assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance withNFPA 105.

C. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies that are listed and labeled, by atesting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratingsindicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazedlite. Install in compliance with NFPA 80.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.


A. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


B. Shipping Spreaders: Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars acrossbottom of frames, tack welded or mechanically attached to jambs and mullions.

C. Store doors and frames under cover at Project site. Place on minimum 4-inch- (100-mm-)high wood blocking.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES


1. LEC Steel Manufacturing.2. Metrotech.

2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS

A. Description: Seamless construction.

1. Face Sheets: Fabricate from 0.050-inch- (1.27-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet.2. Core Construction:

a. Laminated Core: Honeycomb of resin-impregnated kraft paper with maximum1-inch (25.4-mm) cells or foam-plastic insulation.

b. Laminated Steel-Stiffened Core: Stainless-steel vertical stiffeners. Fill spacesbetween stiffeners with mineral-fiber insulation.

c. Fire-Rated Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50mm).

4. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: 0.038-inch- (0.95-mm-) thick stainless steel.5. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Doors: 0.038-inch- (0.95-mm-) thick stainless steel.6. Top and Bottom Channels: Closed with continuous channels, stainless steel.

a. Spot welded to both face sheets.

7. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 866 with reinforcing plates fromstainless steel.

8. Electrical Hardware Enclosures: Provide enclosures and junction boxes with accessplates within doors for electrically operated door hardware, interconnected with UL-approved, 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) diameter conduit and connectors.

B. Performance: Level A, ANSI A250.4.

C. Materials:

1. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, austenitic stainless steel, Type 3042. Foam-Plastic Insulation: Manufacturer's standard polystyrene board.3. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers.

D. Stainless-Steel Finishes: No. 4 (120-320 grit) Hairline Finish

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


2.3 STAINLESS-STEEL PANELS

A. Provide stainless-steel panels of same construction, materials, and finish as specified foradjoining stainless-steel doors.

2.4 STAINLESS-STEEL FRAMES

A. Description: Fabricate stainless-steel frames of construction indicated, with faces of cornersmitered and contact edges closed tight.

1. Door Frames: Machine mitered and full welded.

a. Weld frames according to HMMA 820.

2. Sidelight, Transom and Borrowed-Light Frames: Machine mitered and full welded.3. Door Frames for Openings 48 Inches (1219 mm) Wide or Less: Fabricate from

0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) stainless-steel sheet.4. Door Frames for Openings More Than 48 Inches (1219 mm) Wide: Fabricate from

0.078-inch- (1.98-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet.5. Borrowed-Light Frames: Fabricate from 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) thick, stainless-steel

sheet.6. Sidelight and Transom Frames: Fabricate from stainless-steel sheet of same

thickness as adjacent door frame.7. Glazing and Panel Stops: Formed integral with stainless-steel frames, minimum 5/8

inch (16 mm) high, unless otherwise indicated.8. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites and Panels: 0.038-inch- (0.95-mm-) thick stainless

steel.9. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 866 with reinforcing plates from

stainless steel.10. Head Reinforcement: 0.109-inch- (2.78-mm-) thick, stainless-steel channel or angle

stiffener for openings widths more than 48 inches (1219 mm).11. Jamb Anchors: Masonry type for in-place concrete or masonry.

a. Stainless steel.

12. Floor Anchors: Stainless steel13. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 3/8-inch-thick by 2-inch- (9.5-mm-thick by 50-mm-) wide

from stainless steel.14. Plaster Guards: Stainless steel 0.018-inch- (0.46-mm-) nominal thickness uncoated

steel and 0.022-inch- (0.56-mm-) nominal thickness metallic-coated steel].

B. Performance: Level A, ANSI A250.4.

C. Materials:

1. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, austenitic stainless steel, Type 304.2. Frame Anchors: Stainless-steel sheet. Same type as door face.

3. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Stainless-steel components complying withASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M,Alloy Group 1 or 4) for bolts and nuts.

4. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according toASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

D. Finishes: No. 4

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

B. Grout: ASTM C 476, with a slump of not more than 4 inches (102 mm) as measuredaccording to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

C. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm)dry film thickness per coat.

D. Mineral Fiber Insulation: Rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Stainless-Steel Door Fabrication:

1. Exterior Doors: Close top edges flush and seal joints against water penetration.Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors.

2. Stops and Moldings: Factory cut openings in doors. Provide stops and moldingsaround glazed lites. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or miteredhairline joints.

a. Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of door.b. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of

glazing and type of installation indicated.

3. Hardware Preparation: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware"and"Door Hardware Schedule

a. Reinforce doors to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted doorhardware.

4. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to HMMA 831,"Recommended Hardware Locations for Custom Hollow Metal Doors and Frames."

5. Tolerances: ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 866.

B. Stainless-Steel Frame Fabrication:

1. Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, andinvisible. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or anglesat each joint, fabricated from same thickness metal as frames.

2. Mullions, Rails and Transom Bars]: Provide closed tubular members with no visibleface seams or joints. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt weldingaccording to joint designs in HMMA 820.

3. Provide countersunk, flat-, or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposedfasteners unless otherwise indicated.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spotwelds per anchor.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from topand bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c.and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) in height.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) inheight.

3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) inheight.

4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof more than 96 inches (2438 mm) inheight.

6. Head Reinforcement: For frames more than 48 inches (1219 mm) wide, providecontinuous head reinforcement for full width of opening, welded to back of frame athead.

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive doorsilencers as follows.

a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers.b. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers.

8. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and solid panelswhere indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairlinejoints.

a. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure sideof door or frame.

b. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings suchthat each lite is capable of being removed independently.

c. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type ofglazing or panel and type of installation indicated.

9. Hardware Preparation: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." And"Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)."

a. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted doorhardware.

b. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to HMMA 831,"Recommended Hardware Locations for Custom Hollow Metal Doors andFrames."

10. Plaster Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises and mountingholes in frames to be grouted.

11. Tolerances: Fabricate frames to tolerances indicated in ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 866.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 866 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Stainless-Steel Frames:

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely untilpermanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporarybraces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


b. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations,field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill,dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have

been properly set and secured.f. Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim

as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.g. Apply corrosion-resistant coating to backs of grout-filled frames.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floorand secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners if so indicated andapproved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.4. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled

expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, andinvisible on exposed faces.

5. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalledexpansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and filland make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

6. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to supportingconstruction above, unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structuralsupport at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing tosupporting construction above. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage toframe jamb members.

7. Grouted Frames: Solidly fill space between frames and substrate with grout. Takeprecautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed ordamaged by grout forces.

8. Installation Tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on aline 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on ahorizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners ofjambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

C. Stainless-Steel Doors: Fit non-fire-rated doors accurately in frames with the followingclearances:

1. Non-Fire-Rated Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6

mm).c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum

3/4 inch (19 mm).

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


D. Glazing: Install glazing in sidelights, transoms, and borrowed lights to comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

1. Secure stops with countersunk, flat-, or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformlynot more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c., and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. fromeach corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before finalinspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replacedefective work including stainless-steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, orotherwise unacceptable.

B. Stainless-Steel Touchup: Immediately after erection, smooth any abraded areas of stainlesssteel and polish to match undamaged finish.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 081216 – ALUMINUM FRAMES

08 - OPENINGS


SECTION 081216

ALUMINUM FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes interior aluminum frames for doors and glazing installed in gypsum boardpartitions.



B. Shop Drawings: For interior aluminum frames. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches(300 mm) long in size.

D. Schedule: For interior aluminum frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.Coordinate with door hardware schedule and glazing.






A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled bya qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positivepressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Where indicated, at corridors, smoke barriers, andsmoke partitions, provide assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed incompliance with NFPA 105.

1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m)at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa) of water.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. LOXON2. SOTA

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and temperrequired to suit structural and finish requirements, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

B. Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes, and closers.

1. 90-Minute Fire-Protection Rating: Fabricate aluminum frame assemblies with a cold-formed, primed, interior steel liner.

C. Glazing Frames: Extruded aluminum, for glazing thickness indicated.

D. Ceiling Tracks: Extruded aluminum.

E. Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, with removable snap-incasing trim, glazing stops and door stops without exposed fasteners.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fastenerscompatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and otheritems being fastened.

B. Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard continuous mohair, wool pile, or vinyl seals.

C. Smoke Seals: Intumescent strip or fire-rated gaskets

D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded plastic, to accommodateglazing thickness indicated

E. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing”

F. Hardware: Comply with requirements in Division 08 door hardware Sections.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairlinejoints at butted or mitered connections.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS

Page 3 of 3 Archion Architects

Architectural Specification

B. Factory prepare interior aluminum frames to receive templated mortised hardware; includecutouts, reinforcements, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door HardwareSchedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as required by fire-rated label for assembly.

C. Fabricate frames for glazing with removable stops to allow glazing replacement withoutdismantling frame.

1. Locate removable stops on the inside of spaces accessed by keyed doors.

D. Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners.

2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying withAAMA 2604 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating andresin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install interior aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securelyfastened in place; comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Set frames accurately in position and plumbed, aligned, and securely anchored tosubstrates.

1. At fire-protection-rated openings, install interior aluminum frames according toNFPA 80 and NFPA 105.

C. Install frame components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 96 inches

(2450 mm) long must be one piece.

D. Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methodsrecommended by frame manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610.

E. Touch up marred frame surfaces so touchup is not visible from a distance of 48 inches(1220 mm). Remove and replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorilyrepaired.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 081416 – FLUSH WOOD DOORS

08 - OPENINGS



SECTION 081416

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with plastic-laminate faces.2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.


1. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.


A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind ofdoor; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardwareblocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples: For plastic-laminate door faces and factory-finished doors.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody byan FSC-accredited certification body.

B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "ArchitecturalWoodwork Quality Standards Illustrated.", WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."and WI's "Manual of Millwork."

C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by aqualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positivepressure according to NFPA 5000, UBC Standard 7-2, UL 10C, ASTM 2074-00 Fire Test,and IBC 2000 or IBC 3000.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. (Basis of design)2. Locally fabricated doors

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Certified Wood: Fabricate doors with cores not less than 70 percent of wood products andall wood products produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accreditedcertification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for ForestStewardship."

B. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products thatdo not contain urea formaldehyde.

C. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products thatcomply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of HealthServices' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from VariousSources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

D. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:

1. Extra Heavy Duty: public toilets, and service areas where indicated.

E. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:

1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.

a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N).b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf (1780 N).

F. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to providefire-protection rating indicated.

1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed byouter stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicatedwithout formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescentseals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2.3 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED DOORS

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors (Refer to Door Hardware Schedule for designation)

1. Grade: Premium

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



2. Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.

3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range of products.

4. Exposed Vertical Edges: Plastic laminate that matches faces edge band.5. Core: Structural composite lumber6. Construction: Three plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit

abrasive planed before faces are applied.7. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive

planed before faces and crossbands are applied.

2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES

A. Metal Louvers:1. Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum with Class II, clear anodic finish, AA-

M12C22A31.

B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standardwood-veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approvedfor use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clipswhere required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.

C. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frameformed of 0.048-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; with baked-enamel- orpowder-coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirementsof referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with

applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may beomitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doorsindicated to receive opaque finish.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



C. Use only paints and coatings that comply with the testing and product requirements of theCalifornia Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of VolatileOrganic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions andthe referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do nottrim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors.Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises afterfitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish orcovering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required atProject site.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 083113 – ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

08 - OPENINGS



SECTION 083113

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.2. Floor access doors and frames.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.


C. Samples: For each door face material.

D. Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent toinstallation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 tested according tothe following test method:

1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for fire-rated access door assemblies installed vertically.2. NFPA 288 for fire-rated access door assemblies installed horizontally.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited

to, the following:

1. Toyo Steel Access Doors (by LEC Steel)

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source fromsingle manufacturer.

C. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Toyo Steel (by LEC Steel)

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



2. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer'sstandard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size.

3. Locations: Wall and Ceiling4. Door Size: Refer to Mechanical Plans5. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), 16 gage

a. Finish: Factory prime

6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door7. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard8. Hardware: Lock.

D. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Toyo Steel (LEC Steel)2. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineral-fiber

insulation enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic closerand interior latch release. Provide manufacturer's standard-width exposed flange,proportional to door size.

3. Locations: Wall4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than 3 hours5. Temperature-Rise Rating: 250 deg F (139 deg C) at the end of 30 minutes.6. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: 16 gage

a. Finish: Factory prime

7. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door8. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard9. Hardware: Lock

E. Hardware:1. Lock: Cylinder

a. Lock Preparation: Prepare door panel to accept cylinder specified in Division 08

2.3 FLOOR ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES


1. LEC Steel

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Acudor Products, Inc.2. Babcock-Davis.3. Bilco Company (The).4. Cendrex Inc.5. Dur-Red Products.6. Halliday Products.7. Jensen Industries; Div. of Broan-Nutone, LLC.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



8. Karp Associates, Inc.9. Maxam Metal Products Limited.10. Metropolitan Door Industries Corp.11. MIFAB, Inc.12. Milcor Inc.13. Nystrom, Inc.14. U.S.F. Fabrication.15. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The).

C. Floor Doors, General: Equip each door with adjustable counterbalancing springs, heavy-duty hold-open arm that automatically locks door open at 90 degrees, release handle withred vinyl grip that allows for one-handed closure, and recessed lift handle.

D. Watertight Steel Gutter-Frame Floor Door: Single-leaf opening. Galvanized structural-steelchannel frame forming gutter with NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) drainage coupling and 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick, diamond-pattern, galvanized structural-steel tread plate door; watertight; loadingcapacity to support 300-lbf/sq. ft. (14.4-kN/sq. m) pedestrian live load.

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than 3 hours

a. Finish: Yellow with wording "FIRE DOOR - DO NOT STORE MATERIALS ONSURFACE."

E. Hardware: Provide the following:

1. Hinges: Heavy-duty, stainless-steel butt hinges with stainless-steel pins.2. Latch: Stainless-steel slam latch.3. Lock: Hasp and staple.4. Hardware Material: Stainless steel, including latch and lifting mechanism assemblies,

hold-open arms, and all brackets, hinges, pins, and fasteners.

F. Insulation: Urethane with liner pan.

G. Safety Accessories: Safety chains, net and railing.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

C. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolledsteel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS),exposed.

D. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units readyfor installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, providematerials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposedpitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnishattachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types ofsupports indicated.

D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane whenclosed.

1. For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish

plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish.

2.6 FINISHES



C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the rangeof approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes:

1. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free,universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

2. Factory Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer'sstandard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosettingtopcoat, with a minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 083213 – SLIDING ALUMINUM-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08

- OPENINGS



SECTION 083213

SLIDING ALUMINUM-FRAMED GLASS DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes sliding aluminum-framed glass doors for exterior locations.


A. General: Provide sliding aluminum-framed glass doors capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's sliding doors that are representative of those specified, and that are of minimum test size required by AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.

B. Structural Performance: Provide sliding aluminum-framed glass doors capable ofwithstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing units representative of thoseindicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, Uniform Load StructuralTest:

1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads under conditions indicated according to National Structural Code of the Philippines

2. Deflection Limits: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glassedges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less,at design pressure based on testing performed according toAAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, Uniform Load Deflection Test, or structuralcomputations.

C. Windborne-Debris Resistance: Provide sliding aluminum-framed glass doors capable of

resisting impact from windborne debris according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information

in ASTM E 1996 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperaturechanges. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heatgain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): [120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100

deg C)] material surfaces.



B. Shop Drawings: For sliding aluminum-framed glass doors. Include plans, elevations,sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, and operational clearances.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



- OPENINGS





B. Sample warranty.




A. Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.

B. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.

C. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers andwith GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair orreplace components of sliding aluminum-framed glass doors that fail in materials orworkmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure to meet performance requirements.b. Structural failures including excessive deflection.c. Water leakage or air infiltration.d. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.e. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.f. Deterioration of insulating glass and laminated glass as defined in Division 08

Section "Glazing."

2. Warranty Period:

a. Sliding Door: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.b. Glazing: Fifteen (15) years from date of Substantial Completion.c. Metal Finish: Fifteen (15) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:1. Loxon2. SOTA

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



- OPENINGS



2.2 SLIDING DOOR

A. Thermal Transmittance: Provide sliding aluminum-framed glass doors with a maximumwhole fenestration product U-value indicated:

1. U-Value (Summer) : 1.8W/m2.K

B. Shading Coefficient : 0.45

2.3 GLAZING

A. Glass and Glazing System: Comply with Division 08 Section "Glazing" for safety glass,insulating-glass units, laminated glass, and glazing requirements applicable to glazed slidingaluminum-framed glass doors.

B. Glass: Comply with Division 08 Section "Glazing" for requirements applicable to safetyglazing, insulating-glass units, and laminated glass units.

1. Monolithic laminated glass unit, with PVB interlayer, complying with windborne-debrisresistance.

C. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertightseal

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate sliding aluminum-framed glass doors that are reglazable without dismantling panelframing.

B. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal drainage passages to conduct infiltratingwater to exterior.


A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with[AAMA 2604] [AAMA 2605] and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight incolor coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply withcoating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.


B. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three (3) coat fluoropolymer finish complying withAAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coatand clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to complywith coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



- OPENINGS



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installingdoors, hardware, accessories, and other components.

B. Install sliding aluminum-framed glass doors level, plumb, square, true to line, withoutdistortion, warp or rack of frames and panels, or impeding thermal movement, anchoredsecurely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing, vapor retarders,air barriers, water/weather barriers, and other adjacent construction.

C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, to provide weathertightconstruction.

D. Install sliding aluminum-framed glass doors and components to drain condensation, waterpenetrating joints, and moisture migrating within doors to the exterior.

E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolyticaction at points of contact with other materials according to ASTM E 2112, Section 5.12"Dissimilar Materials."

F. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.

G. Adjust operating panels and screens to provide a tight fit at contact points and weatherstripping for smooth operation, without binding, and a weathertight closure.

H. Adjust hardware for proper alignment, smooth operation, and proper latching withoutunnecessary force or excessive clearance.

I. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing sliding doors. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

J. Clean glass immediately after installing sliding aluminum-framed glass doors. Comply withmanufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Removenonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

K. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damagedduring construction period.

L. Protect sliding door surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting fromconstruction operations. During construction, monitor sliding door surfaces adjacent to andbelow exterior concrete and masonry surfaces for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits,stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact sliding door surfaces,remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Refinish or replace sliding aluminum-framed glass doors with damaged finishes.

N. Replace damaged components.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 084113

– ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS 08 -

OPENINGS



SECTION 084113

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Exterior and interior storefront framing.2. Storefront framing for window walls.3. Storefront framing for ribbon walls.4. Storefront framing for punched openings.5. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door frame units.


A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the followingperformance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defectivemanufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:

1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.3. Failure includes the following:

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and

structural movements to glazing.d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements.e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.f. Failure of operating units.

B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineeringanalysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and designcriteria indicated.

C. Wind Loads: As per National Structural Code of the Philippines

D. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicularto glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individualglazing lite or 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches(4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch(19 mm), whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2mm), whichever is smaller or amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite toless than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearancebetween framing members and glazing or other fixed components directly below them

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :




OPENINGS



to less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and clearance between members and operable units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress,and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

2. Test Durations: Ten (10) seconds.

F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed

glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when

tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq.

ft. (300 Pa)].

G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do notevidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested accordingto ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-

load design pressure, but not less than [6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa)].



B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage ofmoisture in the system to the exterior.


D. Other Action Submittals:

1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as proceduresand diagrams.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply withperformance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed bythe qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.



B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :




OPENINGS





A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including ShopDrawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units insystems similar to those indicated for this Project.

D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirementsfor systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects areindicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components andassemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or moremethods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

E. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and theNational Building Code of the Philippines Disabilities Act.

F. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from singlemanufacturer.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair orreplace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements orthat fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Fifteen (15) years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees torepair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that failin materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not includenormal weathering.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :




OPENINGS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:1. Loxon2. SOTA

B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finishindicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

C. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer,complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparationand pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations inSSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Thermally improved2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.3. Glazing Plane: Multiplane

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out fromthermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads[, finished to matchframing system

D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts,complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :




OPENINGS


E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleedingflashing compatible with adjacent materials or Dead-soft, 0.018-inch- (0.457-mm-) thickstainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M of type recommended by manufacturer.

F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type.

1. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/Lor less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing andproduct requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "StandardPractice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources UsingSmall-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.3 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded orextruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.

2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 2- to 2-1/4-inch (50.8- to 57.2-mm) overall thickness, withminimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-)] thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stilemembers. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeplypenetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separatealuminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to theinterior

2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch (127-mm) nominal width

a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches(255 mm) above floor or ground plane.

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :




OPENINGS



2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated indoor and frame schedule for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this Section.

1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated,and named manufacturers' products.

2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence ofoperation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.

3. Opening-Force Requirements:

a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch and not morethan 30 lbf (133 N) to set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) toopen the door to its minimum required width.

b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to fully open door.

B. Opening-Force Requirements:

1. Delayed-Egress Locks: Lock releases within 15 seconds after applying a force of notmore than 15 lbf (67 N) for not more than 3 seconds.

2. Latches and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) required to release latch.

C. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.

1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each doorleaf.

D. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner.

1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into agroove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed.

2. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin3. Quantities:

a. For doors up to [87 inches (2210 mm) high, provide 3 hinges per leaf.

b. For doors more than [87 and up to 120 inches (2210 and up to 3048 mm)]high, provide 4 hinges per leaf.

E. Continuous-Gear Hinges: Manufacturer's standard with stainless-steel bearings betweenknuckles, fabricated to full height of door and frame.

F. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

G. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

H. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.

I. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspectingagency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testingaccording to UL 305.

J. Cylinders: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware” and Door HardwareSchedule

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :




OPENINGS



1. Keying: Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key controlnumber and include notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE"

K. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated foraluminum framing.

L. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.

M. Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3, extruded aluminum.

1. When used with panic exit devices, provide removable mullions listed and labeled bya testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panicprotection, based on testing according to UL 305. Use only mullions that have beentested with exit devices to be used.

N. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation,sized as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use;adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.

O. Concealed Overhead Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1.

P. Surface-Mounted Holders: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

Q. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for doorlocation indicated, with integral rubber bumper.

R. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.

S. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealedfasteners on mounting strip.

T. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

U. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2,with maximum height of 1/2 inch (13 mm).

V. Finger Guards: Manufacturer's standard collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket anchored toframe hinge-jamb at center-pivoted doors.


A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion ordiscoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces bydescaling or grinding.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :




OPENINGS



C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have thefollowing characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and

moisture migrating within the system to exterior.4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances.6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for

spandrel glazing or metal panels.7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operationand for installing entrance door hardware.

F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatestextent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware beforeapplying finishes.

H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according toShop Drawings.


A. High-Performance Organic Finish: 4-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and cleartopcoat.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.2. Do not install damaged components.3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and

electrolytic deterioration.6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :




OPENINGS



1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action bypainting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installingnonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion bypainting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framingmembers, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, andwithout warp or rack.

F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weatherstripping.

2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance doorhardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructionsusing concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to performfield tests and inspections.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine complianceof installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows. Do not proceedwith installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas showcompliance with requirements.

1. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designatedby Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence waterpenetration.

a. Test Area: A minimum area of 75 feet (23 m) by 1 story of aluminum-framedsystems

C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply withspecified requirements.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determinecompliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

E. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests andinspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :




OPENINGS




PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 084413 – GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

08 - OPENINGS



SECTION 084413

GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes conventionally glazed aluminum curtain walls installed as stick systemassemblies.


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined bytesting of manufacturer's standard glazed aluminum curtain walls representing thoseindicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation,or other defects in construction.

1. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structureincluding, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, anddeflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.b. Glass breakage.c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.e. Failure of operating units.

B. Delegated Design: Design glazed aluminum curtain walls, including comprehensiveengineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirementsand design criteria indicated.

C. Wind Loads: As per National Structural Code of the Philippines

D. Structural-Test Performance: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structuraldistress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2percent of span.

2. Test Durations: 10 seconds.

E. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to [edge of glass in a direction perpendicularto glass plane not exceeding L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazinglite or 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 ofclear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) oran amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm),whichever is less.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2mm), whichever is smaller or amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite toless than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearancebetween framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 1/8inch (3.2 mm).

3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, limitdeflection to two times the length of cantilevered member, divided by 175.

F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixedglazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 15lbf/sq. ft. (720 Pa)

G. Energy Performance: Glazed aluminum curtain wall shall have certified and labeled energyperformance ratings in accordance with NFRC.

1. Reflective Color - Neutral2. Composition (for double-glazed) - 6mm Clear Low-E + 12A + 6mm HS3. Composition (for single-glazed) - 12mm thick tempered glass4. Light Transmission - 505. Visible Light Reflectance (outdoor) - 16%6. Visible Light Reflectance (indoor) - 11%7. U-Value (Summer) (double-glazed) - 1.8 W/m².K8. U-Value (Summer) (single-glazed) - 2.1 W/m².K9. Shading Coefficient - 0.45

Note: Designation of single and double-glazed windows is shown in the Schedule of Doors and Windows.



B. Shop Drawings: For glazed aluminum curtain walls. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for drainingmoisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.

2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of glazedaluminum curtain walls, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds.b. Anchorage.c. Expansion provisions.d. Glazing.e. Flashing and drainage.


D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls indicated to comply withperformance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed bythe qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS




A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency.

B. Energy Performance Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, andcomponents, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each glazedaluminum curtain wall.

C. Product test reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.




A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirementsfor aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects areindicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components andassemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

D. Energy Performance Standards: Comply with NFRC for minimum standards of energyperformance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with morestringent requirements if indicated.

1. Provide NFRC-certified glazed aluminum curtain walls with an attached label.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Assembly Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer and Installer agrees torepair or replace components of glazed aluminum curtain walls that do not comply withrequirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes orreplace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes withinspecified warranty period.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. SOTA2. LOXON

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finishindicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primercomplying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparationand pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations inSSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.3 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Thermally improved2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.3. Glazing Plane: Front.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out fromthermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads fabricated from 300series stainless steel.

D. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of [1 inch (25.4 mm)] thataccommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible withadjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steelinserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

E. Concealed Flashing: [Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleedingflashing compatible with adjacent materials or Dead-soft, 0.018-inch- (0.457-mm-) thickstainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M of type recommended by manufacturer.

F. Framing Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealants.

2.4 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Division 08 Section "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.

1. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/Lor less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).



A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion ordiscoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces bydescaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing tomaintain required glazing edge clearances.

5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior forspandrel glazing or metal panels.

6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatestextent possible.

D. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Internal guttering system or other means to drain water passing joints, condensationoccurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminumcurtain wall to exterior.

2. Pressure-equalized system or double barrier design with primary air and vapor barrierat interior side of glazed aluminum curtain wall and secondary seal weeped andvented to exterior.

E. Factory-Assembled Frame Units:

1. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.2. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.3. Install glazing to comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

F. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according toShop Drawings.


A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Four (4)-coat fluoropolymer finish complying withAAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coatand clear topcoat.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.2. Do not install damaged components.3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and

electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.6. Weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of

finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding.7. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action bypainting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installingnonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion bypainting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framingmembers, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain walls to comply with the followingmaximum tolerances:

1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3.2 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6 mm in 12 m).2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3.2 mm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6 mm in 12 m).3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding elementup to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.6mm).

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1inch (12.7 to 25.4 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch (3.2mm).

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25.4mm) wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.7 m); 1/2 inch(12.7 mm) over total length.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas of glazed aluminum curtainwalls shall take place as installation proceeds to determine compliance of installedassemblies with specified requirements.

1. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified forlaboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than 0.50cfm/sq. ft. (2.25 L/s per sq. m), of fixed wall area when tested according toASTM E 783 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

a. Test Area: One bay wide, but not less than 30 feet (9.1 m), by one story ofglazed aluminum curtain wall

b. Perform a minimum of three (3) tests in areas as directed by Architect.c. Perform tests in each test area as directed by Architect. Perform at least three

tests, prior to 35% completion.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


2. Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested according to ASTM E 1105 at a minimumuniform and cyclic static-air-pressure differential of 0.67 times the static-air-pressuredifferential specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, butnot less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa), and shall not evidence water penetration.

a. Test Area: One bay wide, but not less than 30 feet (9.1 m), by one story ofglazed aluminum curtain wall

b. Perform a minimum of Three (3) tests in areas as directed by Architect.c. Perform tests in each test area as directed by Architect. Perform at least three

tests, prior to 35 percent completion

3. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designatedby Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence waterpenetration.

a. Test Area: A minimum area of 75 feet (23 m) by one story of glazed aluminumcurtain wall

C. Glazed aluminum curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests andinspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 085113 – ALUMINUM WINDOWS

08 - OPENINGS



SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes aluminum windows for exterior locations.



B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens,operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealantinstallation.1. Submit progressively comprehensive, detailed and dimensioned shop drawings to

indicate all set-out and construction details, adjacent work by others and allproprietary products where required details are not indicated in the manufacturer’sproduct data.

2. Separate packages of shop drawings should be submitted for each window wall andcladding package, complete with general notes, parts lists and structural calculationsthat are certified by the Engineer responsible for checking and certifications on behalfof the General Contractor.

3. The approval of shop drawings is for member sizes, surface treatment and soundnessof structural connections. Approval will not be given for any dimension or fabricationrelated issues. Furthermore, the approval in no way alleviates the General Contractorfrom responsibility for errors and omissions.

4. Shop drawings shall be scaled for A1 size presentation, and submitted for review asA3 size.

5. Time required for examination of shop drawings will be 20 working days for eachsubmission, including re-submissions.

6. Manufacturer should not commence until approval to use the relevant shop drawingshas been obtained.

7. Package of Shop Drawings shall include and indicate the following:a. A drawing index sheet indicating all drawing numbers and full description of

content. The drawings are to be clear and all texts must be written in English.b. General Notes indicating:

1) Relevant codes and standards2) Project load conditions, acoustic requirements, and other performance

criteria.3) Material and structural properties and specifications for all metals, glass,

silicone, etc.4) Material properties and specifications for all other materials, insulation,

etc.5) Schedules of all hardware6) Schedules of fasteners, bolts, fixings, and anchors.

c. Overall elevations and plans for entire building, indicating:1) Full scope of Works2) References to packages of details3) Dimensions for Architect’s review4) Largest critical dimensions of various components5) Zones of wind loading

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


6) Numbering system for window wall panels7) Locations of Fire Access Panels.

d. Set-out of all work, including reference points, edge conditions and joint pattern,indicated on plans, elevations and sections as applicable.

e. Tables showing full-size sections of all extrusions and structural members,including descriptions of structural properties, and specifications of materials.

f. Framing, anchorage, and fixings supported from base-structure, andembedment in the base-structure, if required.

g. Movement joints.h. Methods of assembly at all junctions, including sealing and fixing, indicated by

three-dimensional and exploded views as required. Provide isometric 3D andexploded views of all interfaces between the various façade systems, includingall corners, if they cannot be adequately described by simple plan and section.A specialist may need to be engaged by the General Contractor for thispurpose.

i. Method of installation, including:1) Erection tolerances2) Machined slots, keyholes and other methods for handling and connecting

components3) Junctions and trim to base-structure and adjoining surfaces.4) Fully dimensioned set-out drawings and templates.5) All pre-tensioning and pre-stressing stages required to meet the design

criteria (for frameless glass walls)6) Access and materials handling equipment and requirements.

j. Steelwork details include:1) Section sizes with complying steel grades2) Grade of bolts3) Types, sizes and position of welds4) Weld preparation requirements5) Cambers to steel sections6) Locations and sizes of bleed holes in tubes7) Cover plates8) Temporary cleats and lifting points, with load capacities9) Spider fitting connection points.

k. Glazing details including:1) Glazing materials including sealants, gaskets, tapes, setting and spacer

blocks.2) Rebate depth, and edge restraint.3) Clearances and tolerances.4) Methods of in-service glass replacement.5) Hardware, fittings and accessories.6) Point supported Insulated glass units (for frameless glass walls)

l. Method of draining the assembly, including details showing:1) Pressure equalized drained joints2) Location, number, and size of weep holes3) Mechanical baffles to drainage outlets, which are not pressure equalized.

m. Methods of meeting performance criteria for thermal insulation, fire resistance,sound transmission loss and the like.

n. Methods of cleaning and maintenance in serviceo. Panel details, including all joints and junctions, and support systems and panel

stiffening.p. Connection details (including component parts, all information relevant to

fabrication, surface treatment, and erection) and provision for lightningprotection.

8. Shop drawings shall be in strict compliance with “prototype as tested” drawingsapproved as part of the prototype testing procedure. No alterations are permitted to

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


the approved shop drawings without written confirmation of the change from the Architect.

9. Provide a complete numbering system and schedule for all cladding and glazingpanels. Each panel shall be individually numbered in such a way that themanufacturing and installation history can be traced.

10. Design and implement an approved permanent concealed marking system showingcorrect location and orientation when installed. Details to be submitted.

11. Indicate the location of each individual panel on shop drawings. Submit as-builtelevations progressively indicating the location of each individual panel.

C. Samples: Submit within 30 days of the award of Contract the following items:1. Representative samples of products and materials, with technical data (catalogues)

including finishes and representative factory-fabrications and site-installedassemblies. Samples to be typically 300x300mm. Include 3 samples each of thefollowing:a. Metal types and finishes, including proposed finished shapes, sections, and

extrusions. Provide metallurgical analysis certificates for alloy and temper ofmetal components.

b. Glass types and finishes indicating color, surface pattern or texture, finish,surface coatings, and the range of variation if any.

c. Color samples of pre-finished production material showing the limits of therange of variation in the selected color.1) Check samples to confirm or match Architect’s sample.2) Finishes control samples.3) Color samples for all sealants, gaskets, and accessories.

d. Joint system components, including sealants, gaskets, interlays, rain-screens,baffles, flashings, elastomeric sealants, backing rods, etc. with details ofcompatibility with silicone and polyurethane based sealants, and all extrudedgaskets, interlayer’s, sealants, tapes and fixings.

e. Typical fabrications and assemblies, showing welds and grinding, screwed andbolted junctions, fastenings and workmanship.

f. Fixing and accessory items.1) Bolts, nuts, washers, screws, pins, and rivet (with all grades indicated)2) Proprietary hardware

g. Miscellaneous materials:1) Insulating material2) Backing material3) Interlayers4) Lightning protection tabs5) Panel materials for spandrels and other non-vision areas.

h. Examples of repairs and making good to typical range of in-service damage tofinishes, including chips, cracks and scratching.

i. Additional samples for testing sealants and finish coatings as required.j. A range of color samples of pre-finished materials samples showing the limits

of the range of variation in the selected color.

D. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.



B. Sample warranties.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



1.4 COORDINATION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to Project Manager / Architect for review and approval within 60 days of the Award ofContract the following items:

1. Five (5) sets of A1 shop drawings2. Five (5) sets of A3 shop drawings, calculations that are certified by a Registered

Structural Engineer (representing the General Contractor) to the Local Municipality.a. Setting-out of all work, including reference points, edge conditions and joint

pattern, indicated on plans, elevations and sections as applicable.b. Framing, anchorage and fixings supported from base-structure.c. Size, finish and grade of all members and sections.d. Reinforcement of connections.e. Glass types and thickness.f. Types and magnitudes of the design loads on the fixing anchors or

attachments.g. Confirmation of all performance criteria, in particular, all movement allowances.h. Fire resistance requirements.i. Indexed drawings and calculations, which are fully cross-referenced.j. Nominate all materials and finishes (in particular on contact surfaces).k. Areas of operable windows are to be shown on elevations.l. Analysis of stresses in structural silicone.m. Thermal Transfer Calculationsn. Any information requested by the Local Municipality.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and todemonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Testmock-ups shall be designed, supplied, fabricated and installed in accordance with approvedmock-up drawings and approved trial assemblies. The mockups are required to be tested inaccordance with clause 1.5 B.1. Complete scaled shop drawings, including chamber steelwork, and full size details of

each prototype to be tested. Fully support shop drawings with engineeringcomputations as required.

2. Window wall testing proposal with itemized tests, test chamber size and details,proposed method of monitoring air pressure and water flow rates, and deflectiontransducer positions.

3. Program for procurement of materials, assembly of mock-up, testing, and reporting.4. Test reports and mockup drawings of the actual test specimens are to be certified by

the testing agency and submitted to the Architect for record.

B. Prototype Performance Testing:

1. Supply and erect off-site full-scale window wall test performance prototypes for façadetesting in accordance with the Contract Documents including suitable simulatedbuilding frame and incorporating at least one example of each repetitive designelement and construction method in the system, as indicated on the Drawings.Testing shall include structural performance, air infiltration, water penetration, proof-load testing and visual assessment.

2. The test prototypes will be approved subject to carrying out the test program and thesubmission of all specified requirements, and the satisfactory passing of all structural

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


performance, air infiltration, water penetration and proof criteria by the testing laboratory. When approved, the test prototype shall be the accepted control standard for the Works. Test panels and components shall not be re-used in the Works.

3. Submit details of the proposed laboratory, including curriculum vitae of the testingofficer in charge. Submit a detailed and sequential outline of the proposed testprocedure with schematic diagrams describing the type and location of all datacollection instruments.

4. One of the following testing laboratories is to be used but not limited to the following:a. PHILCO TESTING LABORATORYb. FACADETECHc. WINWALL TECHNOLOGY

5. The registered testing laboratory shall be an approved independent laboratory, whichconducts testing in accordance with ISO/IEC 17025:2005 “General Requirements forthe competence of testing and calibration laboratories”, is considered technicallyadequate subject to test procedure/ resources and project requirements.

6. Submit a detailed and sequential testing program with diagrams indicating the typeand location of data collection instruments. Do not commence testing until approved.

7. Prototypes: Test prototypes shall typically be minimum 2-storey high and 2 bays widewith one corner return. They shall incorporate the largest size of panel found on thefaçade. Deviations from the above may be considered, depending on actual façadeconfiguration.

8. Testing: Submit notice in writing of proposed commencement of the PerformanceTesting, complete with Program, not less than 2 weeks before commencement. Thetesting shall include all actual jobsite components, including all glazing configurations,sealants, adhesives and gaskets. Instruments and gauges shall be selected, testedand located by the testing officer in charge in consultation with the Architect andProject Manager.

C. Field Testing.1. 100% Field water testing shall be carried out during façade installation to AAMA

501.2. Should problems arise, the Architect may instruct that further testing becarried out. Locations and times of testing shall be nominated by the Architect andProject Manager and should be witnessed by parties representing the Owner,Architect, and the General Contractor.

2. General field water testing per AAMA 501.2: Field water testing shall be carried outperiodically during the façade installation This is to ensure that leaks are identified andrepaired prior to installation of internal linings and finishes.a. Initially 30 sqm shall be tested following installation of the first 3 floors of

window wallb. Further testing of 30 sqm shall be carried out every 5 floors. (Minimum of 5

locations each)c. Each test shall cover an area of not less than 30 sqm and not les than 5 linear

meters of work.d. The tests shall be included in the program by the General Contractor, with

specific locations as selected by the Architect or Project manager.e. Should problems arise during any of the above testing, the Architect may

instruct that further testing be carried out at no additional costs. The Architect/Project manger shall nominate locations and times.

3. Water Testing of Flashings, EPDM Closures and other Interfaces:a. Field water testing shall be carried out periodically during the façade

installation. This is to ensure that leaks are identified and repaired prior toinstallation of internal linings and finishes.

b. Initially 100% of linear interfaces shall be tested, following the installation of thefirst 3 floors.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


c. Further testing of 50% shall be carried out thereafter. Successful testing mayallow for decreased quantity of further testing.

d. Each test shall cover an area of not less than 5 linear, meters of work.e. The tests shall be included in the program by the General Contractor, with

specific locations as selected by the Architect.f. Should problems arise, the Architect may instruct that further testing be carried

out, at no extra cost. The Architect shall nominate locations, extents, andtimes.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows thatfail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. The defects and liabilityperiod for the Work begins at the date of Certificate of Completion under the Main Contractby the Owner representative and ends after a period of one (1) year. After the defects andliability period, the General Contractor is to be responsible for and warrant for the warrantyperiod of fifteen (15) years all functional and performance design requirements of thecomplete building envelope systems, with the exclusion of paint color retention, which is tohave a warranty period of 10 years. Provide a warranty for materials and workmanship ofthe building envelope for a period of fifteen (15) years. Provide all manufacturers’ productwarranties. Also provide a warranty to cover all the costs of materials, labor and equipmentto remove any defective components of the building envelope and replace them. Thiswarranty shall also cover the costs associated with removing and replacing internal finishestrims and services so that remedial works can be carried out. The content of each warrantyis to be approved by the Project Manager/ Architect

1. Warranty Period:

a. Window: 15 years from date of Certificate Completion.b. Glazing Units: 15 years from date of Certificate Completion.c. Aluminum Finish: 15 years from date of Certificate of Completion.

1) Coatings: All preparation and coating work shall be warranted for 15years. The only exception is that the works shall be warranted againstfading or color change in excess of 5 NBS units calculated frommeasurements on spectrophotometer or colorimeter capable of colormeasurement by reflectance readings in accordance with ASTM D3344for 10 years.

2) Works shall also be warranted against chalking in excess of #8 chalkrating when measured in accordance with ASTM D4214 for 15 year.

3) The General Contractor and specialist applicator shall jointly warrant thecoating system in complete conformance to the standards listed abovefor a period of 15 years from the Certificate of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


1. Loxon Wandset2. Seapac3. Sota

2.2 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Vision Glass Window Double Glazed Low-E

1. Reflective Color - Neutral2. Composition (for double-glazed) - 6mm Clear Low-E + 12A + 6mm HS3. Composition (for single-glazed) - 8mm thick HS reflective glass4. Light Transmission - 505. Visible Light Reflectance (outdoor) - 16%6. Visible Light Reflectance (indoor) - 11%7. Solar Energy Transmission -8. Solar Energy Reflectance -9. U-Value (Summer) (double-glazed) - 1.8 W/m².K10. U-Value (Summer) (single-glazed) - 2.1 W/m².K11. Shading Coefficient - 0.45

B. Laminated Glass

1. Reflective Color - Neutral2. Composition - 6mm Clear+1.52mm clear pvb+6mm

tempered clear3. Light Transmission - 464. Visible Light Reflectance (outdoor) - 9%5. Visible Light Reflectance (indoor) - 6%6. Solar Energy Transmission -7. Solar Energy Reflectance -8. U-Value (Summer) - 3.6 W/m².K9. Shading Coefficient - 0.47

C. Product Standard: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.

2.3 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

A. Operating Types: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Frames and Sashes: Aluminum extrusions complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.

C. Glass: Heat strengthened Reflective Glass

1. Punch windows: Double glazed Low-E and HS single-glazed

2. Vision windows: Double glazed Low-E and HS single-glazed

3. Storefronts: 12mm thick laminated glass4.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


D. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertightseal.

E. Hardware, General: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant hardware sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions.

1. Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's fullrange

F. Projected Window Hardware:

1. Hinges: Non-friction type, not less than two per sash.2. Lock: Key-operated custodial lock with keeper and removable handle3. Limit Devices: Limit clear opening to 4 inches (100 mm) for ventilation; with custodial

key release.

G. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unlessotherwise indicated.

H. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors,and other components.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible.For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Column Covers: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated onDrawings.

B. Interior Trim: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings.

C. Panning Trim: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings.

D. Receptor System: Two-piece, snap-together, thermally broken, extruded-aluminum receptorsystem that anchors windows in place.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assemblingcomponents and anchoring windows.

B. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory.

C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation.

D. Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.

E. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged sashes and similar lines of natural waterpenetration.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


F. Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors forsupport to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances andprovide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, asindicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads ofwindow units.

G. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in thefactory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary forshipment and installation.


A. High-Performance Organic Finish (Three (3)-Coat Fluoropolymer): Thermocured systemconsisting of inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight complying with AAMA 2605.

1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware,accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements notaddressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements inASTM E 2112.

B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermalmovement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wallflashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.

C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, andmoisture migrating within windows to the exterior.

D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolyticaction at points of contact with other materials.

E. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather strippingfor smooth operation and weathertight closure.

F. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protectivecoatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and othersubstances.

G. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damagedduring construction period.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE

08 - OPENINGS


SECTION 087100

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.b. Sliding doors.c. Folding doors.

2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections.3. Electrified door hardware.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the products listed below.Coordinating and scheduling the purchase and delivery of these products remainrequirements of this Section.

1. Weatherstripping, Thresholds to be installed under other Sections.2. Permanent lock cores to be installed by Owner.



B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Other Action Submittals:

1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailingfabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures anddiagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and relatedwork to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same doornumbers as in the Contract Documents.

b. Content: Include the following information:

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material ofeach door and frame.

2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings onfloor plans and to door and frame schedule.

3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style,function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardwareproduct.

4) Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation andinterfaces with other building control systems.

2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner'sfinal keying instructions for locks.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protectivecovering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Door Hardware: <Insert detailed descriptions and specific numbers of units>.

2. Electrical Parts: <Insert detailed descriptions and specific numbers of units>.


A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained andapproved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who isavailable during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Ownerabout door hardware and keying.

B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providingconsulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design,and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows:

1. For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC)

C. Source Limitations: Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer asmechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that performelectrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.

D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide doorhardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled bya qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positivepressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control doorassemblies are required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assembliestested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m)at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa) of water.

F. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by atesting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



G. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch.Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

H. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply withthe National Building Code of the Philippines BP 344 Disabilities Act and the U.S.Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA AccessibilityGuidelines.

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting ofthe wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).

2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular todoor.

b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch.c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not

more than [1/2 inch (13 mm) high] [and] [3/4 inch (19 mm) high for exterior sliding

doors].4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the

door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch,measured to the leading edge of the door.

I. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements inDivision 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Deliver all hardware to the building site properly wrapped with correct screws and bolts forfastening, free from flaws and defects. Properly label hardware for location with itemnumbers corresponding with the hardware schedule.

B. Materials should be stored in such a way as to protect and identify hardware for anexpeditious installation.

C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.

D. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.

1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Hardware supplier shall coordinate with the Contractor or other Subcontractors to select,order, and have hardware delivered so as to not impede the progress of the project.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Where necessary for proper installation, furnish actual hardware to the manufacturer for hisinstallation. Furnish samples to the manufacturer as required so that all provisions forattachment, clearance and other requirements (i.e., such as electrical wiring of magneticswitches can be made.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



B. All cutouts for hardware in premachined wood, hollow metal and aluminum doors andframes shall be made to templates.

C. Furnish templates and approved hardware schedules to all interested manufacturers insufficient quantities for fabrication and preparation of their work to receive hardware.

D. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardwarewith connections to power supplies, fire alarm system and detection devices, and securitysystem.

E. Coordinate cylinders for use in gates or special doors with suppliers of these items.

F. Existing Openings: Where new hardware components are scheduled for application toexisting construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, fieldverify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit openingconditions and to provide for proper operation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair orreplace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specifiedwarranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use.

2. Warranty Period: Finish hardware items are subject to the same guarantee and/orwarranty provisions as the General Construction unless noted herein after.a. Lock and Latchsets: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.b. Electromagnetic and Delayed-Egress Locks: Five years from date of

Substantial Completion.c. Exit Devices: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.d. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion

1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Furnish manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for each type of hardwareprovided and furnish Owner with necessary wrenches and tools required for propermaintenance of installed hardware.

B. Advise and instruct the Owner in the systems' operation. Instruct Owner's personnel onproper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes.

C. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' fullmaintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventivemaintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, leaning,and adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and suppliessame as those used in the manufacture and installation of original products.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. Provide items as listed in schedule at end of this section, complete to function as intended.

B. Items of same function and performance are acceptable in conformance as listedhereinafter.

C. Fastenings: Furnish appropriate screw attachments, through-bolts, and/or sex nuts andbolts.All plates (kick, push, mop, etc.) shall be fastened with Phillips oval head screws, ovalhead, undercut and countersunk. Fasteners of all hardware items shall be of the samematerial and grade as the hardware they are fastening. On other than metallic kickplates,screws to match or complement other door hardware.

D. The hardware distributor shall furnish all wiring diagrams, drawings, and advise the ElectricalContractor of proper wiring hookup of all systems. Manufacturers: Subject to compliancewith requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified

2.2 CYLINDERS

A. Cylinders shall be as manufactured by Schlage and have no less than 7 pins.. Allow forfuture expansion.

2.3 KEYING

A. Door Locks shall be keyed in like groups, keyed differently, master keyed, and grandmasterkeyed.

B. All cylinders shall be furnished construction master keyed and shall be keyed alike, different,and cross keyed in their respective sets.

C. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." In addition to Owner,Construction Manager, Contractor, and Architect, conference participants shall also includeInstaller's Architectural Hardware Consultant and Owner's security consultant. Incorporatekeying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keyingsystem including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required,and plans for future expansion.

2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram3. Requirements for key control system4. Address for delivery of keys

D. Furnish key quantities as follows:1. 2 keys for each lock2. 4 keys for each keyed group3. 3. 3 construction master keys

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


2.4 MANUFACTURERS

A. Outline

Item Basis of Design Acceptable Manufacturers

Hinges Hager Stanley, Mckinny

Locksets Schlage No substitution

Cylinders Schlage No substitution

Exit Devices Von Duprin Dorma

Door Closers/ Operators

LCN Dorma

Floor Closers Dorma No substitution

Overhead Concealed Door Closers

Dorma RTS Falcon

Door Stops Rockwood Ives

Flushbolts Rockwood Ives

Push/ Pull plates Hager Ives

Kick/Armor plates Hager Ives

Door pulls Hager Ives

Custom-designed door pulls

EJ Metals (fabricator) No substitution

Thresholds Pemko National Guard

Raindrips Pemko National Guard

Sound seals Pemko National Guard

Smoke seals Pemko National Guard

Weatherstrip Pemko National Guard

Door Silencers Rockwood Ives

Astragal/ Meeting Stiles

Hager Markar

Magnetic Holder LCN Sentronic No substitution

Please refer to Door Hardware Schedule.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


B. Acceptable Manufacturers are subject to compliance with requirements. Basis of Designmanufacturers and model numbers are listed to establish a standard of quality. Submitting anonequal product of an acceptable manufacturer, does not meet the intent of the establishedstandard.

2.5 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled to comply with requirements in thisSection.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and namedmanufacturers' products

2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence ofoperation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctivequalities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule"Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed foreach door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimumrequirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door HardwareSchedule" Article.

2. References to BHMA Designations: Provide products complying with thesedesignations and requirements for description, quality, and function.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and framesaccording to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."

C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated on Drawings otherwiseindicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831.3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for

Wood Flush Doors."

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Wherecutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later tobe painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation ofsurface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do notinstall surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachmentsubstrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

E. Door Closers and Holdopens, unless specifically noted otherwise, shall be mounted towardthe room side, and not the corridor.

F. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which arelater to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then removeand store in a safe place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes,reinstall each item. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completedon the surface.

G. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachmentsubstrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

H. Drill and countersink units which are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Spacefasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

I. Cut and fit thresholds and floor covers to profile of door frames, with mitered corners andhairline joints. Join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut smoothopenings for spindles, bolts and similar items.

J. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealantcomplying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." Screwthresholds to substrate with No. 10 or larger screws, of the proper type for permanentanchorage and of the same or compatible type metal as the threshold.

K. At exterior doors, and elsewhere as indicated, set each edge of threshold in a seal strip ofbutyl rubber sealant or acrylic polymeric sealant, equivalent of Pecora BC-158 or 60+Unicrylic and remove excess.

L. The Construction Manager shall coordinate to ensure that all necessary wiring andconnections between the electrified hardware products specified herein, and the operationalsystems will function as they were intended. This includes the integration of such items aselectric exit devices, electric strikes, electric door openers, electromagnetic floor and wallhold-open devices, magnetic switches, card readers, etc., into the fire alarm, security alarmor operating systems. House power to the specified low voltage power supplies is alsoincluded.

M. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewerthan the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge forevery 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless otherequivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

N. Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate offsetpivots in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than one intermediateoffset pivot per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for every 30 inches (750mm) of door height greater than 90 inches (2286 mm).

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


O. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during constructionperiod.

1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying schedule ordirected by Owner.

2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.

P. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control systemcabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

Q. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, aboveaccessible ceilings or in equipment room. Verify location with Architect.

1. Configuration: Provide one power supply for each door opening] [least number ofpower supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware.

R. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in doorhardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.

S. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

T. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

U. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.

V. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door toensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted tooperate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation ofheating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.


A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independentArchitectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 088000 - GLAZING

08 - OPENINGS



SECTION 088000

GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specifiedin other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Windows: Interior: Fire-rated

2. Interior Windows: Tempered

3. Metal-framed Skylights and Canopies


A. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis accordingto ASTM E 1300 and ICC's 2003 International Building Code by a qualified professionalengineer, using the following design criteria:

1. Design Wind Pressures: As per National Building Code of the Philippines and theNational Structural Code of the Philippines.

2. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, designglass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-durationload.

3. Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15 degrees from vertical,design glass to resist each of the following combinations of loads:

a. Outward design wind pressure minus the weight of the glass. Base design onglass type factors for short-duration load.

4. Thickness of Patterned Glass: Base design of patterned glass on thickness atthinnest part of the glass.

5. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differentialshading within individual glass lites.


A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tapesealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to andcompatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of currentsealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12inches (300 mm) square.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Usesame designations indicated on Drawings.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirementsand design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professionalengineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.


A. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently markglazing with certification label of the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer'sname, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

B. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing withcertification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shallindicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or otheropenings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has atemperature rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C), and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites inthicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.1. Double-glazed Low-E2. 12mm thick laminated glass

2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING

A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptableto authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testingaccording to [NFPA 252 for door assemblies] [and] [NFPA 257 for window assemblies].

B. Film-Faced Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic flat glass; 3/16-inch (5-mm) nominal thickness;faced on one surface with a clear glazing film; complying with testing requirements in16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the followingavailable products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limitedto, the following]:

a. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products);FireLite NT.

b. Safti First; SuperLite C/SP.c. Schott North America, Inc.; Filmed Pyran Stard. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Keralite FR-F.

2.3 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness requiredto maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:

1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864.2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDMgaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required tomaintain watertight seal.

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by insertingdense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by meansof pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and withother materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glassunits, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, asdemonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions forselecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditionsexisting at time of installation.

3. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of notmore than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPAMethod 24).


5. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's fullrange

B. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testingagencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used forapplications and fire-protection ratings indicated.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


2.5 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solidselastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with orwithout spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers forapplication indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for productsindicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure.3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated withadhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primarysealant.

2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combinationwith a full bead of liquid sealant.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plusor minus 5.

C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glassmanufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (sidewalking).

E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size anddensity to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealantperformance.

F. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agencythat listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application andfire-protection rating indicated.

2.7 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING TYPES

A. Glass Type 120-minute fire-rated glazing with 450 deg F (250 deg C) temperature riselimitation; laminated glass with intumescent

1. Provide safety glazing labeling.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, andother glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those inreferenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation toprovide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealantthicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glassfrom Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edgedamage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impairperformance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined bypreconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazingpublications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course ofcompatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from movingsideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer andaccording to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

3.2 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges areflush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapesto make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs.Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by insertingdense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removablestops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS


3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openingsexactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely inplace with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocksand press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gasketsformed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasketapplications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to producea weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints withsealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocksand press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets andpressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compressgaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Sealgasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, betweenglass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant fromextruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacersor spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relativeto edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting orbond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossedstreamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface.Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from constructionoperations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact withglass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfacesat frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt,scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glassmanufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damagedfrom natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 088300 – MIRRORS

08 - OPENINGS


SECTION 088300

MIRRORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors:

1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors.



B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachmentsto other work.

C. Samples:

1. Mirrors: 12 inches (300 mm) square, including edge treatment on two adjoiningedges.

2. Mirror Clips: Full size.3. Mirror Trim: 12 inches (300 mm) long.


A. Preconstruction test reports.

B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.




A. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirrormanufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing andsubstrates on which mirrors are installed.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which mirror manufacturer agrees toreplace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors isdefined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage orto maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defectsinclude discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS

A. Glass Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturersoffering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limitedto, the following:

a. Pacific Glass Corporationb. PMK Glass

B. Toughened Glass: Mirror (Silver quality Twin-coated glass mirror)

1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0mm thick

2. Arrised, ground and polished on exposed edges

3. 25mm beveling on exposed perimeter


A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plusor minus 5.

B. Edge Sealer: Approved by mirror manufacturer.

C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically forsetting mirrors.

1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of not more than [70] g/L when calculatedaccording to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the CaliforniaDepartment of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile OrganicEmissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

D. Film Backing for Safety Mirrors: Film backing and pressure-sensitive adhesive; bothcompatible with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



2.3 MIRROR HARDWARE

A. Perimeter Clips: Stainless steel section deep enough to produce a glazing channel toaccommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover bottom and topedges of each mirror in a single piece.

1. Finish: Stainless steel hairline finish.

B. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it infinished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.

C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces.Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, forcompliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affectingperformance of the Work.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirrormastic with existing finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected andsurfaces are dry.

B. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation ofsubstrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coatingwhere applicable.

C. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions. Mountmirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.

D. Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with anchoring details as indicated in the detailedplans of Architect.

E. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from constructionoperations.

F. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.

G. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisturefrom condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.

H. Wash exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled forinspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash mirrors as recommendedin writing by mirror manufacturer.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS




PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 089000 – LOUVERS AND VENTS

08 - OPENINGS



SECTION 089000

LOUVERS AND VENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum and formed-metal louvers

B. See Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for louvers in hollow-metal doors.

C. See Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for louvers in flush wood doors.

D. See Division 23 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment.


A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by aqualified professional engineer, using structural and seismic performance requirements anddesign criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and thefollowing loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanentdeformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle orflutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings.2. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a Wind Pressure Zone II, acting inward or

outward.

C. Seismic Performance: Louvers, including attachments to other construction, shall withstandthe effects of earthquake motions determined according to the NSCP.

1. Design earthquake spectral response acceleration, short period (Sds) for Project is

<Insert value>.2. Component Importance Factor is 1.0.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



D. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, asdemonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except forlength and width according to AMCA 500-L.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.A

1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showingspecified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, andspacing.

C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural and seismicperformance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed bythe qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as requiredfor forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.2. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip-galvanized steel or 300 series stainless-

steel fasteners.3. For fastening stainless steel, use 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.4. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.


A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowancesmade for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimetersealant joints.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet as standard withlouver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes boltedconnections between frame members necessary.

2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A. Horizontal Storm-Resistant Louver

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturersoffering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limitedto, the following:

a. CS Louversb. Colt Louversc. SOTA

2. Louver Depth: [5 inches (125 mm)] or to match required louver depth required byMechanical Design

3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) for bladesand 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) for frames.

4. Louver Performance Ratings: Refer to Mechanical Design requirements. Submit dataof the following for Mechanical Consultant’s review and approval:

a. Free Area:b. Air Performance:c. Wind-Driven Rain Performance:

B. FIXED, ACOUSTICAL LOUVERS

1. Louver with formed-metal blades filled on interior with mineral-fiber, acousticalinsulation retained by perforated metal sheet of same material and finish as blade

2. Basis of Design: C/S Acoustic Louver System3. Louver depth: 300mm4. Frame Material: Extruded aluminum not less than 0.080-inch nominal thickness.5. Blade material: Aluminum sheet, not less than 0.080-inch nominal thickness.6. Blade shape: Airfoil7. Blade angle: 45 degress unless otherwise indicated.8. Louver Performance ratings: (Verify Mechanical Plans/ Design Calculations)9. Air-borne Sound-Transmission Loss:

Frequency Hz 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

Noise Reduction 13 10 13 15 16 16 17 20

C. Horizontal, Nondrainable-Blade Louver

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:

a. Loxon Wandset, Incb. SOTA Philippines Inc.

2. Louver Depth: 6 inches (150 mm)].

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



08 - OPENINGS



3. Blade Profile: Blade with center baffle.

4. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch (2.03 mm).5. Louver Performance Ratings: Submit the following data for Mechanical Consultant’s

review and approval:

a. Free Area:b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration:c. Air Performance:


A. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with [AAMA 2604][AAMA 2605] and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating andresin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect’s sample

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacentwork.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screwswhere required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, asindicated.

D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items thatcannot be refinished in the field to the factory and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete,masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coatingof bituminous paint.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 092216 – NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

09 - FINISHES



SECTION 092216

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings and soffits.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to thosetested according to ASTM E 119.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested inassembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413.

C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content ofsteel products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer

recycled content is not less than [25] percent.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steelstuds and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm).2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following in thickness not less thanindicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs:

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES


1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-)deep flanges, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuousbridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateralbracing.

2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit insiderunner.

3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishesdue to deflection of structure above.

C. Firestop Tracks: Manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract withmovement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assemblyindicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depthof studs.

D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and widthindicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm)

E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness,with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-mm-

) thick, galvanized steel.

F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm)2. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm).

G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed toreduce sound transmission.

1. Configuration: hat shaped

H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated in the drawings.2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum

uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch (0.8 mm).3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-

mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

I. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm)wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-)diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES


B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Anchors: Capable of sustaining a load equal to 5 times that imposed as determinedby ASTM E 488.

a. Type: Post-installed, expansion anchor.

2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Capable of sustaining, a load equal to 10 times thatimposed as determined by ASTM E 1190.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm)in diameter.

D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch (25 by 5 mm) by length indicated.

E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of0.053 inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).

F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep.

2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners ordimpled steel studs and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm).b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm).

4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep members designed to reducesound transmission.

a. Configuration: hat shaped.


A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide asphalt saturated organic felt or foam gasket.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES


1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 thatapply to framing installation.

2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements inASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation.

3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844that apply to framing installation.

4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that applyto framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavytrim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framingmembers. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater thanspacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals atexterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height tostructural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions areindicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetratingpartitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports,install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading offinished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-

inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint infinished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside ofoverhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same asrequired for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills ofopenings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-ratedassembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floorto underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

6. Curved Partitions:

a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent toarcs.

b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equallyalong arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs,place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to wood framing.2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry

attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

F. Z-Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced [24 inches(610 mm)] [600 mm] o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wallwith concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-drivenfasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flangeextending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange offurring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space secondmember no more than 12 inches (305 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.

G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not morethan 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater thanspacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated bybuilding structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects withinceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resultinghorizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hangerspacings that interfere with locations of hangers, install supplemental suspensionmembers and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger

inserts that extend through forms.5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within [1/8 inch in 12feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes andtransversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 092400 – PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING

09 - FINISHES



SECTION 092400

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior portland cement plasterwork on unit masonry and monolithic concrete.2. Exterior portland cement plasterwork on unit masonry or monolithic concrete.



B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints includingplans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated.


A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster assembliesidentical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualifiedtesting agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

B. Sound-Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide portland cement plasterassemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for STC ratings per ASTM E 90 andclassified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified testing agency.

C. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) in surfacearea to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time ofSubstantial Completion.


A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.

B. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for environmental conditions for applying finishes.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or ofdamaging plaster, lath, or accessories.

B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long,free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster.

C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass,slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants"

1. Sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the CaliforniaDepartment of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile OrganicEmissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.2 PLASTER MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.

1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray.

B. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.

D. Perlite Aggregate: ASTM C 35.

2.3 PLASTER MIXES

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.

1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least twominutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities inmixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. (0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitiousmaterials.

B. Base-Coat Mixes: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows:

1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to3/4 part lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



2. Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portlandcement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part ofcementitious material.

3. Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.

C. Base-Coat Mixes: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows:

1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.

2. Masonry Cement Mix: Use 1 part masonry cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.3. Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.

D. Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes:

1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement and

[3/4 to 1-1/2] [1-1/2 to 2] parts lime. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part ofcementitious material.

2. Masonry Cement Mix: 1 part masonry cement and 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate.3. Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland

cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part ofcementitious material.

4. Plastic Cement Mix: 1 part plastic cement and 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmfuleffects caused by plastering.

B. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capabilityrequired to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.

B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Where required, install blankets before installing lath unlessblankets are readily installed after lath has been installed on one side.

C. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abuttingconstruction with acoustical sealant.

3.3 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES

A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.

B. Reinforcement for External Corners:

1. Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



2. Install cornerbead at interior locations.

C. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.

1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximumsizes:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. (13.4 sq. m).b. Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m).

2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet (5.5 m) o.c.3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of

not greater than 2-1/2:1.4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster.5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas

(panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimensionchange.

3.4 PLASTER APPLICATION

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.

B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete plaster bases.

C. Walls; Base-Coat Mix: Scratch coat for two-coat plasterwork, 3/8 inch (10 mm) thick onconcrete masonry.

1. Portland cement mixes.2. Masonry cement mixes.3. Portland and masonry cement mixes.4. Plastic cement mixes.5. Portland and plastic cement mixes.

D. Ceilings; Base-Coat Mix: Scratch coat for two-coat plasterwork, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick onconcrete.

1. Portland cement mixes.2. Masonry cement mixes.3. Portland and masonry cement mixes.4. Plastic cement mixes.5. Portland and plastic cement mixes.

E. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide finish to match Architect's sample.

F. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, andsealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Concealed Exterior Plasterwork: Where plaster application will be used as a base foradhered finishes, omit finish coat.

H. Concealed Interior Plasterwork:

1. Where plaster application will be concealed behind built-in cabinets, similarfurnishings, and equipment, apply finish coat.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES


2. Where plaster application will be concealed above suspended ceilings and in similarlocations, finish coat may be omitted.

3. Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhesive application of tile andsimilar finishes, omit finish coat.

3.5 PLASTER REPAIRS

A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and checkcracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond tosubstrate has failed.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 092900 – GYPSUM BOARD

09 - FINISHES


SECTION 092900

GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materialsand construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 byan independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and constructionidentical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classifiedaccording to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Low Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and constructionidentical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and productrequirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for theTesting of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-ScaleEnvironmental Chambers."

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half

of preconsumer recycled content not less than <_> percent.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



B. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800km) of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as wellas manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.

C. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800km) of Project site.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD


1. Boral Plasterboard Philippines, Inc. or equal

B. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- andmold-resistant core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type.2. Long Edges: Tapered.3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10.

2.4 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS

A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturersoffering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limitedto, the following:

a. Boral Platerboard Philippines Inc.. or equal

2. Core: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead: Paper faced metal B1 super wideb. LC-Bead: J-shaped long flange receives joint compiund: Paper faced metal B9Jc. Control joint: Zinc control joint No. 093d. Curved-edge cornerbead: With notched or flexible flangese. Bullnose inside corner: Paper faced metal SLIC

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet or rolled zinc.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbeadb. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compoundc. Expansion (Control) joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and

removable strip covering slot openingd. Fasteners shall be Type S-12 coated with Type S Climaseale. Attach control joint with Bostitch 9/16 inch “G” stainless steel staples.

C. Aluminum Trim: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that iscompatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, usesetting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, andtrim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting type, sandable topping compound4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound5. Skim coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping

compound or drying-type, all purpose compound.

D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:

1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting type,sandable topping compound.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards andmanufacturer’s written recommendations.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).

1. Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than <Insert number> percent.

D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne soundtransmission through perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing according toASTM E 90. As specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants”.

E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."

F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."

2.8 NON-LOADBEARING STEEL FRAMING AND ACCESSORIES

A. All metal framing must be gauge indicated or heavier. “Equivalent” gauge is not acceptable.

B. Provide metal framing materials in accordance with ASTM C 645 and C 754. Verify limitingheights and gauges of members of wall system with manufacturer's data and increasegauge if required. Use L/240 for gypsum board. Metal framing shall be 25% recycledmaterial.

1. Manufacturers:a. Basis of Design: JEA Steel Industries

C. Steel Studs: G40 (G60 where subject to moisture), galvanized steel, 20 gauge structural,minimum 0.0329 inch uncoated steel thickness, sizes as noted on drawings.

D. Steel Furring Members: Galvanized steel, G40 (G60 where subject to moisture), stud, orType DWC (hat-shaped), 25 gauge, minimum 0.0179 inch uncoated steel thickness or 20gauge, minimum 0.0296 inch uncoated steel thickness as required, Type Unimast Z, 24gauge, or cold-rolled channel, 16 gauge of sizes indicated on Drawings or as requiredstructurally.

E. Fasteners and Anchorages: ASTM C 1002 as recommended by manufacturer and asrequired for loads. Exception: Use only low-profile head screws for steel-to-steel fasteners.

F. Adjustable Furring Brackets: 20 gauge galvanized steel.

G. Blocking: 20 gauge steel stud sections and/or 16 gauge cold rolled steel plate and/or lumber,width to suit specific requirements as specified herein in PART 3- EXECUTION.

H. Metal Angles: Sized as indicated on drawings, galvanized steel, 24 gauge.

I. Cold Rolled Channels: 16 gauge in 3/4 inch and 11/2 inch sizes, G40 (G60 where subject tomoisture).

J. Resilient Channels: One leg 1/2 inch deep members, design thickness 0.0188 inch designedto reduce sound transmission.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, andmold damaged.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structuralabutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at theselocations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal jointsbetween edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fastenersused for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.2. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations

approved by Architect for visual effect.

E. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated asnot intended to receive tape.

G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels according to ASTM C 840:

H. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly removefrom floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwisedamaged during drywall application.

I. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 093000 - TILING

09 - FINISHES



SECTION 093000

TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Homogeneous Polished and Unpolished Granite Tiles2. Waffle-type Non-skid Cement-based tiles3. Waterproof membrane.4. Metal edge strips.



B. Samples:

1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.2. Assembled samples, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for

each color and finish required.


A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installedand that are packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amountinstalled for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and todemonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation.2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TILE PRODUCTS

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

B. FloorScore Compliance: Tile for floors shall comply with requirements of FloorScoreStandard.

C. Low-Emitting Materials: Tile flooring systems shall comply with the testing and productrequirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for theTesting of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-ScaleEnvironmental Chambers."

D. Tile Type 1: Homogeneous Anti-skid Floor tiles (Designated as F-12)

1. Manufacturers/ Distributors/ Importers:a. Mariwasab. Prime Coverings

2. Composition: Impervious natural stone3. Module Size: 300x300mm4. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm).5. Face: Pattern of design indicated6. Surface: Slip-resistant7. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range8. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range9. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range

E. Tile Type 2: Homogeneous Anti-skid Floor tiles (Designated as F-13)

1. Manufacturers/ Distributors/ Importers:

a. Mariwasab. Prime Coverings

2. Composition: Impervious natural stone3. Module Size: 600x600mm4. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm).5. Face: Pattern of design indicated6. Surface: Slip-resistant7. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range8. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range9. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range

F. Tile Type 3: Homogeneous Polished Wall tiles (Designated as W-6)

1. Manufacturers/ Distributors/ Importers

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES




2. Composition: Impervious natural stone3. Module Size: 300x300mm4. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm).5. Face: Pattern of design indicated6. Surface: Polished7. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range8. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range9. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range

G. Tile Type 4: Homogeneous Polished Wall tiles (Designated as W-7)

1. Manufacturers/ Distributors/ Importers


2. Composition: Impervious natural stone3. Module Size: 600x600mm4. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm).5. Face: Pattern of design indicated6. Surface: Polished7. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.8. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.9. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

H. Tile Type 5: Homogeneous Outdoor Stone tiles (Designated as F-14)

1. Distributors/ Importers: Felport/ Prime

2. Composition: Impervious natural stone3. Module Size: 600x6004. Thickness: 25mm (approx)5. Face: Pattern of design indicated6. Surface: Non-skid7. Finish: Non-skid

2.2 THRESHOLDS

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition betweenadjacent floor finishes.

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch (1.5mm) above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold.Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less above adjacent floor surface.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



2.3 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

A. General: Refer to Division 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection Section “Self-AdheringSheet Waterproofing”.

2.4 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02.

B. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1.

1. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.

C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.

1. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added.2. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive.3. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.

2.5 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10.

B. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.

C. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.1. Basis-of-Design Product: MAPEI Corporation

a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company.b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.c. Bostik, Inc.d. C-Cure.e. Custom Building Products.f. Jamo Inc.g. Laticrete International, Inc.h. MAPEI Corporation.i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.j. Summitville Tiles, Inc.k. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.

2. Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.3. Polymer Type: Liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.

D. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3[, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less whencalculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D].

1. Basis-of-Design Product: MAPEI Corporation

a. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc.b. Boiardi Products; a QEP company.c. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.d. Bostik, Inc.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



e. C-Cure.f. Custom Building Products.g. Jamo Inc.h. Laticrete International, Inc.i. MAPEI Corporation.j. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.k. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.l. Summitville Tiles, Inc.m. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.

E. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same product used in factory to pregrout tile sheets.

2.6 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that complywith the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants."

1. Sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).


B. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulatedwith fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substratesthat are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :

a. DAP Inc.; [Titanium Enriched Kitchen and Bath Sealant] [100 percent SiliconeKitchen and Bath Sealant].

b. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786.c. GE Silicones, a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700.d. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil Tile & Stone Sealant.e. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant.f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White.

C. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25;Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.


a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 550.b. Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Sonolastic SL 2.c. Pecora Corporation; [Dynatrol II-SG] [NR-200 Urexpan].d. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-2c SL.e. Tremco Incorporated.; [THC-900] [THC-901] [Vulkem 245].

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES




A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials forinstallations indicated.

B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, stainless steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.

C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and thatdoes not change color or appearance of grout.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer.b. Bostik, Inc.; CeramaSeal [Grout & Tile Sealer] [Magic Seal] [Silox 8]

[Siloxane 220].c. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978.d. Custom Building Products; [Surfaceguard] [Grout and Tile] [Grout] Sealer.e. Jamo Inc.; [Matte Finish] [Penetrating] Sealer.f. MAPEI Corporation; KER [003, Silicone Spray Sealer for Cementitious Tile

Grout] [004, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout and Tile].g. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer.h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer.i. TEC, a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; [TA-256 Penetrating Silicone] [TA-

257 Silicone] Grout Sealer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affectingperformance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that areincompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and othersubstances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatnesstolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed withadhesives with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforcedmortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) towarddrains.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Projectsite before installing.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed toprevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them withcontinuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tilesurfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methodsspecified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installationmethods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and groutingmaterials used.

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tileinstallation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:

a. All floor tiles.b. All non-skid cement-based tiles.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form completecovering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly atobstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marringvisible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items forstraight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and otherpenetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tileedges.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work andcenter tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work tominimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widthsunless otherwise indicated.

F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:

1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).2. Quarry Tile: [1/4 inch (6.35 mm)] [3/8 inch (9.5 mm)].3. Paver Tile: [1/4 inch (6.35 mm)] [3/8 inch (9.5 mm)].4. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).5. Decorative Thin Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of settingmaterials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly abovethem.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants."

H. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



I. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated groutjoints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

J. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions toproduce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.

3.4 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:

1. Tile Installation F112: Cement mortar bed (thickset) bonded to concrete; TCA F112.

a. Tile Type: Type 1 & 2.b. Thin-Set Mortar for Cured-Bed Method: Dry-set portland cement mortar.c. Grout: Sand-portland cement (Type 5) and Water cleanable epoxy grout for

Tile Type 1 & 2.

B. Interior Wall Installations, Masonry or Concrete:

1. Tile Installation W211: Cement mortar bed (thickset) bonded to substrate; TCA W211.

a. Tile Type: Tile Type 3 & 4 and 5b. Bond Coat/Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar.c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 095123 – ACOUSTIC TILE CEILING

09 - FINISHES



SECTION 095123

ACOUSTIC TILE CEILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.



B. Evaluation reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and todemonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings.2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motionsdetermined according to ASCE/SEI 7

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testingagency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL

A. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.

C. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.

D. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS ACT 1

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings (Armstrong #1910 square cut lay-in Ultima design, with HumiGuard Plus humidity resistance, DuraBrite finish, Bioblock white acrylic latex paint finish, on an acoustically transparent membrane (Type IV per ASTM E 1264), square edge.Classification: 24” x 24”

C. Color: As indicated on Drawings

D. LR: .90

E. NRC: 0.70, Type E-400 mounting according to ASTM E 795.

F. CAC: 35

G. AC: N/A

H. Edge/Joint Detail: Beveled Tegular

I. Thickness: 9/16 inch (15 mm)

J. Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



2.4 SUSPENSION SYSTEM 1

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM 1

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings (Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Suprafine 9/16” Exposed TeeSystem

2. For use with ACT 1 refer to drawings<

B. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation; with prefinished 9/16-inch- (15-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type.3. Face Design: Flat, flush4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet.5. Cap Finish: Painted white

C. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if notindicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply withseismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color asthat used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic designrequirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's"Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widthsat opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, andcomply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as indicated on reflected ceilingplans.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 095423 – LINEAR METAL CEILINGS

09 - FINISHES



SECTION 095423

LINEAR METAL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes strip linear metal pans and suspension systems for ceilings.



B. Samples: For each exposed finish.


A. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating and showing the following:

1. Linear pattern.2. Joint pattern.3. Ceiling suspension members.4. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.5. Ceiling-mounted items.6. Ceiling perimeter and penetrations through ceiling; trim and moldings.


C. Evaluation reports.




A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials, asdetermined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by UL or another testingand inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Seismic Standard: Comply with the following:

1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply withASTM E 580.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



2. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's"Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings -Seismic Zones 0-2."

3. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's"Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies -Seismic Zones 3 & 4."

4. UBC Standard 25-2, "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay-inPanel Ceilings."

5. SEI/ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9,"Earthquake Loads."

6. National Structural Code of the Philippines

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and todemonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time ofSubstantial Completion.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LINEAR METAL CEILING PANS

A. Acoustical Metal Pan Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard linear metal pans ofconfiguration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400.

B. Sheet Metal Characteristics: For metal components exposed to view in the completedWork, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materialswith exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, roughness, stains, or discolorations.

1. Aluminum Sheet: Roll-formed aluminum sheet, complying with ASTM B 209(ASTM B 209M); alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisherfor type of use and finish indicated.

2. Steel Sheet: Commercial-quality, cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet; stretcher leveledand ASTM A 591/A 591M, 40Z (12G) coating for painted finishASTM A 1008/A 1008M for electroplating; with protective coating complying withASTM C 635 and recommended by finisher for finish indicated.

C. Pan Fabrication: Manufacturer's standard units formed from metal indicated to snap on andbe securely retained on carriers without separate fasteners and finished to comply withrequirements indicated.

D. Pan Splices: Construction same as pans, in lengths 8 to 12 inches (200 to 300 mm); withmanufacturer's standard finish.

E. End Caps: Manufacturer's standard material fabricated to fit and conceal exposed ends ofpans.

F. Filler Strips: Manufacturer's standard material; fabricated to uninterruptedly close voidsbetween pans.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



G. Moldings and Trim: Provide manufacturer's standard moldings and trim for exposedmembers, and as indicated or required, for edges and penetrations of ceiling, aroundfixtures, at changes in ceiling height, and for other conditions; of same metal and finish aslinear metal ceiling pans.

H. Sound-Absorbent Fabric Layer: Sized to fit concealed surface of pan, bonded to pan in thefactory with manufacturer's standard nonflammable adhesive, and consisting of black,nonwoven, nonflammable, sound-absorbent material with surface-burning characteristics forflame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as determinedby testing per ASTM E 84.

I. Sound-Absorbent Pads: Plastic sheet-wrapped glass-fiber insulation complying withASTM C 553, width and length to completely fill between carriers, joined at center of panel,with surface-burning characteristics for flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as determined by testing per ASTM E 84.

2.2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Metal Suspension Systems Standard: Provide ceiling manufacturer's standard metalsuspension systems of types and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635requirements.

B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Postinstalled expansion Anchors: With capability to sustain, without failure, a loadequal to five (5) times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testingper ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing andinspecting agency.

a. Corrosion Protection: Zinc-plated steel, ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005mm) for Class SC

2. Power-Actuated Fasteners: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices forattaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, aload equal to ten 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined bytesting per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M,Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

1. Size: Yield stress of wire to exceed 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C 635,Table 1, Direct Hung), but not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.

D. Carriers: Factory finished

1. Main Carriers: Aluminum, not less than 0.240-inch (6.0-mm) rolled sheet, alloy andtemper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finishindicated, complying with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).

2. Main Carriers: Steel, not less than 0.0209-inch (0.53-mm) nominal thickness, cold-rolled sheet, with factory-applied protective coating, complying with ASTM C 635.

3. Carriers: Manufacturer's standard.

E. Carrier Splices: Same metal, profile, and finish as indicated for carriers.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



F. Stabilizer Channels, Tees, and Bars: Manufacturer's standard components for stabilizingmain carriers at regular intervals; spaced as standard with manufacturer for use indicated;and factory finished with matte-black baked finish.

G. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard.

H. Edge Moldings and Trim: As indicated or required to comply with seismic requirements ofauthorities having jurisdiction, to conceal edges of penetrations through ceiling, to concealends of pans and carriers, for fixture trim and adapters, for fasciae at changes in ceilingheight, and for other conditions; of metal and finish matching linear metal pans or extrudedplastic unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 ALUMINUM PANS AND SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR LINEAR METAL CEILING (C-8 Schedule of Finishes)

A. Aluminum Pans and Suspension System:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:a. Hunter Douglas Architectural Products, Inc.;b. Eagleshield

B. Classification: Units complying with ASTM E 1264 for Form 2, unperforated

C. Pan Thickness: Not less than 0.032 inch (0.8 mm).

D. Pan Edge Detail: Beveled

E. Linear Module Width and Pan Face Width: 8-inch (203-mm) module width and 7-1/4-inch(184-mm) face width

F. Pan Depth: 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep

G. Pan Face Finish: High-performance organic coating in color selected from manufacturer'sfull range

H. End Cap, Finish of Exposed Portions: To match pan

I. Filler Strip Design: Recessed

J. Filler Strip, Finish of Exposed Portions: To match pan.

K. LR: Not less than 0.70

L. NRC: Not less than 0.65

M. Suspension-System Main-Carrier Material: Aluminum or Manufacturer's standard materialand protective finish.


A. High-Performance Organic Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with [AAMA 2604][AAMA 2605] and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with [ASTM C 636] [UBC Standard 25-2] and seismic requirement indicated, permanufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contactwith insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required tomiss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or otherequally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenumproduces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalentdevices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacingrequired, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hangerwires.

1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor intoconcrete slabs.

2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs

C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of each suspended decorativegrid and where necessary to conceal edges of grids. Screw attach moldings to substrate atintervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) fromends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

D. Install suspension system carriers so they are aligned and securely interlocked with oneanother. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

E. Cut linear metal pans for accurate fit at borders and at interruptions and penetrations byother work through ceilings. Stiffen edges of cut units as required to eliminate evidence ofbuckling or variations in flatness exceeding referenced standards for stretcher-leveled metalsheet.

F. Install linear metal pans in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings andtrim.

1. Align joints in adjacent courses to form uniform, straight joints parallel to room axis inboth directions.

2. Fit adjoining units to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut units for accurate fit atborders and around construction penetrating ceiling.

3. Install pans with butt joints using internal pan splices.

a. Joint Configuration: Aligned, every other panel length

4. Where metal pan ends are visible, install end caps unless trim is indicated.5. Install filler strips where indicated.6. Install sound-absorbent fabric layers in perforated metal pans.7. Install sound-absorbent pads at right angle to perforated metal pans so pads do not

hang unsupported.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 096513 – RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

09 - FINISHES



SECTION 096513

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base.



B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples butnot less than 300mm long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products accordingto ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces toreceive resilient products.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended bymanufacturer.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have beencompleted.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE (Designated as B-5 in the Schedule of Finishes)

A. Resilient Base:


a. Azrockb. Tarkettc. Toli

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

1. Material Requirement: Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset).2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous).3. Style: Cove (base with toe).

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).

E. Lengths: Each piece as long as possible, per surface.

F. Outside Corners: Job formed

G. Inside Corners: Job formed

H. Finish: Matte

I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based orblended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer forapplications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient productsand substrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. ADA Compliance: All flooring in wet condition shall be in accordance with ADA recommendation for slip-resistance, COF of 0.6 for level and 0.8 for ramped surfaces.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion ofresilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according toASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with

adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methodsrecommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with

installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed withinstallation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rateof 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed withinstallation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humiditylevel measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patchingcompound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they areto be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will beinstalled at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately beforeinstallation.

3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, andother permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops ofadjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base incontinuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES




A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilientproducts.

B. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 096516 - RESILIENT FLOORING

09 - FINISHES



SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Vinyl sheet floor covering, with and without backing.2. Rubber sheet floor covering, without backing.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locations ofseams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, andcutouts.

C. Samples: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230-mm)sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required.







A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces toreceive floor coverings.


C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.

E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have beencompleted.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient sheet flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.

B. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and productrequirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for theTesting of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-ScaleEnvironmental Chambers."

2.2 VINYL SHEET FLOOR COVERING (F-4, F-5, F-6 of Schedule of finishes)

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1. Tarkett, Inc.2. TOLI International

B. Unbacked Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913, [0.080 inch (2.0 mm)] thick.

C. Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering with Backing: ASTM F 1303. (Cushioned sheet for F-8)

1. Type (Binder Content): Type II, minimum binder content of 34 percent.2. Wear-Layer Thickness: Grade 1.3. Overall Thickness: As standard with manufacturer4. Interlayer Material: Foamed plastic.5. Backing Class: Class C (foamed plastic).

D. Wearing Surface: Smooth for F-4, F-6, and F-7, Smooth with embedded abrasives for F-5

E. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer

F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors

2.3 RUBBER SHEET FLOOR COVERING (F-9 of Schedule of Finishes)

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1. Tarkett Inc.2. Flexco3. LG Floors

B. Unbacked Rubber Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1859.

1. Type: Type I (homogeneous rubber sheet2. Thickness: As standard with manufacturer

C. Hardness: Not less than required by ASTM F 1859

D. Wearing Surface: Textured with Molded pattern.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



1. Molded-Pattern Figure: Raised discs or Raised squares

E. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer

F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.



B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor covering andsubstrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L when calculatedaccording to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the CaliforniaDepartment of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile OrganicEmissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:

1. Cove Strip: 1-inch (25-mm) radius provided or approved by manufacturer.2. Cap Strip: Square metal, vinyl, or rubber cap or Tapered vinyl cap provided or

approved by manufacturer.3. Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by

manufacturer.

D. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion offloor coverings.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.



3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows.Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed withinstallation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate

of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humiditylevel measurement.


D. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to beinstalled.

1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installedat least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately beforeinstallation.

3.2 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings.

B. Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.

C. Lay out floor coverings as follows:

1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at

least 6 inches (152 mm) away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates.3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.4. Avoid cross seams.

D. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanentfixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cuttingby repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanentmarking device.

G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate toproduce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

H. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 4 inches (100 mm) up vertical surfaces.Support floor coverings at horizontal and vertical junction by cove strip. Butt at top againstcap strip.

1. Install metal corners at inside and outside corners.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor covering.

B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor coveringbefore applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply three (3) coats.

C. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 096519 – RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

09 – FINISHES


SECTION 096519

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vinyl composition floor tile.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns,doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.






B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who arecompetent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation andseaming method indicated.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certifiedby floor covering manufacturer for installation techniques required.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 – FINISHES



C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and todemonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for floor coverings including resilient base and accessories.

a. Size: Minimum 9 SQM, type color and pattern in locations directed by Architect.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces toreceive floor tile.


C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.


A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather,with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but notless than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Furnish quantity of not less than 1.5% for each color, pattern, and type of floor tilesinstalled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE (Designated as F-1)

A. Products:

1. Manufacturers:a. Tolib. Azrockc. Tarkett Inc.

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 – FINISHES


C. Thickness: 3.2mm

D. Size: 300 x 300mm.

E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.


A. Products:

1. Manufacturers:

a. TOLIb. Azrockc. Tarkett, Inc.


C. Thickness: 3.2mm

D. Size: 450 x 450mm.



A. Products:

1. Manufacturers:

a. TOLIb. Azrockc. Tarkett, Inc.


C. Thickness: 3.2mm

D. Size: 150 x 900mm or 1200mm




B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile andsubstrate conditions indicated.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 – FINISHES


C. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient tile flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScoreStandard.

1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculatedaccording to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.


D. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximummoisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified inother Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale and foreigndeposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion ofresilient products.





4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer.Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.


D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to beinstalled.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will beinstalled at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 – FINISHES


E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately beforeinstallation.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minoroffsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoidusing cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequenceas manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, ordeformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanentfixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floortiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for futurecutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or othernonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate toproduce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.

B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfacesbefore applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply two (2) coats.

C. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 096536 – STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING

09 - FINISHES



SECTION 096536

STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Conductive, solid vinyl floor tile.


A. Static-Dissipative Properties: Provide floor coverings with static-control properties indicatedas determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by an independenttesting and inspecting agency.

1. Electrical Resistance: Test per [ASTM F 150 with 100-V applied voltage] [ESD-STM-7.1].

a. Average greater than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000 megohmswhen test specimens are tested surface to ground.

b. Average no less than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000 megohmswhen installed floor coverings are tested surface to ground.

2. Static Generation: Less than [300] V when tested per AATCC-134 at 20 percentrelative humidity with conductive footwear.

3. Static Decay: 5000 to 0 V in less than [0.25] seconds when tested per FED-STD-101C/4046.1.

B. Conductive Properties: Provide floor coverings with static-control properties indicated asdetermined by testing identical products per test method indicated by an independent testingand inspecting agency.

1. Electrical Resistance: Test per [ASTM F 150 with 500-V applied voltage] [ESD-STM-7.1] [NFPA 99, Annex E] [UL 779].

a. Average greater than 25,000 ohms and less than 1 megohm when testspecimens and installed floor coverings are tested surface to surface (point topoint).

b. Average no less than 25,000 ohms with no single measurement less than10,000 ohms when installed floor coverings are tested surface to ground.

2. Static Generation: Less than [100] V when tested per AATCC-134 at 20 percentrelative humidity with conductive footwear.

3. Static Decay: 5000 to 0 V in less than [0.03] [0.01]seconds when tested per FED-STD-101C/4046.1.

C. FloorScore Compliance: Static-control resilient flooring shall comply with requirements ofFloorScore Standard.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



D. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and productrequirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for theTesting of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-ScaleEnvironmental Chambers."



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, edges,columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

C. Samples: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than [6-by-9-inch (152-by-230-mm)]sections of each color and pattern of floor covering required.



B. Field quality-control reports.







A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces toreceive floor coverings.


C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.

E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have beencompleted.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTIVE RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS (F-7 of Schedule of Finishes)

A. Conductive, Solid Vinyl Floor Tile: ASTM F 1700, Class I (monolithic), Type A (smoothsurface).


a. Tarkett, Inc.b. Forbo Flooring, Inc.; Colorex EC Conductive Vinyl Tile.c. Gerflor, Architectural Floor Systems, Inc.; Mipolam Technic EL 5.

2. Thickness: In manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.08 inch (2.0mm).

3. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm)4. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement or blendedhydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applicationsindicated.

B. Static-Control Adhesive: Provided or approved by manufacturer; type that maintains electrical continuity of floor covering system to ground connection.

1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculatedaccording to 40 CFR, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.


C. Grounding Strips: Provided or approved by manufacturer; type and size that maintainselectrical continuity of floor covering system to ground connection.

D. Integral-Flash-Cove Base Accessories:

1. Cove Strip: 1-inch (25-mm) radius support strip provided or approved bymanufacturer.

2. Cap Strip: Square metal, vinyl, or rubber cap provided or approved by manufacturer.3. Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by

floor covering manufacturer.

E. Maintenance Floor Tiles: Special floor tiles inscribed "Conductive floor. Do not wax."

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES


F. Floor Polish: Provide protective, static-control liquid floor polish products as recommendedby floor covering manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions and with oversight bymanufacturer's representative to ensure adhesion of floor coverings and electrical continuityof floor covering systems.


1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor

covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanicalmethods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.


4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows.Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed withinstallation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rateof 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed withinstallation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humiditylevel measurement.


D. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to beinstalled.

1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installedat least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately beforeinstallation.


A. Install static-control resilient floor covering according to manufacturer's written instructionsand with oversight by manufacturer's representative.

B. Embed grounding strips in static-control adhesive. Extend grounding strips beyond perimeter of static-control resilient floor covering surfaces to ground connections.

C. Scribe, cut, and fit floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces andpermanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



D. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extendfloor covering to center of door openings.

E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for futurecutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or othernonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

F. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of static-control adhesive applied tosubstrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising andpuckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surfaceimperfections.

G. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 6 inches (152 mm) up vertical surfaces.Support floor coverings at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top againstcap strip.

1. Install metal corners at inside and outside corners.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minoroffsets, so floor tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary toavoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half floor tile at perimeter.

1. Lay floor tiles square with room axis

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting floor tiles from cartons in same sequenceas manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, ordeformed floor tiles.

D. In each space where conductive, solid vinyl floor tile is installed, install maintenance floor tileidentifying conductive floor tile in location approved by Architect.

3.4 SHEET FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing sheet floor coverings.

B. Unroll sheet floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.

C. Lay out sheet floor coverings as follows:

1. Maintain uniformity of sheet floor covering direction.2. Minimize number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at

least 6 inches (152 mm) away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates.3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.4. Avoid cross seams.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES




A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to test electrical resistance of static-controlresilient floor covering systems for compliance with requirements.

1. Arrange for testing after installation static-control adhesives have fully cured and floorcovering systems have stabilized to ambient conditions and after ground connectionsare completed.

2. Arrange for testing of floor coverings before and after performing floor polishprocedures.

B. Static-control resilient floor coverings will be considered defective if they do not pass testsand inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floorcoverings.

B. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from constructionoperations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of constructionperiod.

1. Do not wax static-control resilient floor coverings.2. If recommended in writing by manufacturer, apply protective static-control floor polish

formulated to maintain or enhance floor covering's electrical properties to floorcovering surfaces that are free from soil, static-control adhesive, and surfaceblemishes.

a. Verify that both floor polish and its application method are approved bymanufacturer and that floor polish will not leave an insulating film that reducesfloor coverings' effectiveness for static control.

C. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 097500 – STONE FACING

09 - FINISHES


SECTION 097500

STONE FACING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following interior applications of dimension stone:1. Wall paneling.2. Column facing.3. Base.

B. See Division 09 Section "Stone Flooring" for stone flooring.

C. See Division 12 Section “Stone Countertops” for stone countertops


A. Product Data: For each variety of stone, installation materials, and other manufacturedproducts.


1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structuralanalysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible fortheir preparation.

C. Samples:

1. For Each Stone Type: Include three (3) or more Samples in each set and show thefull range of variations in appearance characteristics expected in completed Work.

2. For each color of grout and pointing mortar required.


A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who employs experienced stone setters who are skilledin installing interior stone facing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated forthis Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-serviceperformance.

1. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing interior stone facing,including anchoring system and providing professional engineering services neededto assume engineering responsibility.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensiveengineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from asingle quarry, whether specified in this Section or in another Section.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards formaterials and execution.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES


1. Build mockups for the following kinds of interior stone facing:

a. Typical interior stone wall paneling, about 1000mm long by 1800mm high.b. Stone base, about 1200mm long.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GRANITE : Wall (W-17 of Schedule of Finishes) Baseboard: (B-3 of Schedule of Finishes)

A. Granite: Comply with ASTM C 615.

B. Available Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, stone varietiesthat may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

C. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of thefollowing:

1. Multi-rich

2. Liberty Stile

3. Euro Asia

4. Guanco

D. Finish: Polished and Flamed.

2.2 TRAVERTINE

A. Travertine: Comply with ASTM C 1527, Classification II Interior.



1. Multi-rich

2. Liberty Stile

3. Euro Asia

4. Guanco

D. Cut: Vein cut.

1. Orientation of Veining: As indicated.

E. Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural markings occur.

F. Filling: Fill pores on faces of stone with cementitious filler of color selected by Architect.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES


G. Finish: Polished.

2.3 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Molding Plaster: ASTM C 59/C 59M.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.

1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according toASTM C 114.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Aggregate: ASTM C 144.

E. Water: Potable.

2.4 GROUT

A. Grout Colors: Match stone, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and whiteor colored aggregate as required to produce required color.

C. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that maybe incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. Bostik Findley Inc.b. Laticrete International, Inc.c. MAPEI Corp.d. Hydromente. (Or approved equivalent)

3. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged withother dry ingredients.

4. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form foraddition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.

5. Polymer Type: Either ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackagedwith other dry ingredients, or acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latexform for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.

6. Grout Type: Unsanded.

D. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, chemical-resistant, water-cleanable, tile-setting and -grouting epoxy.



PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



a. Bostik Findley Inc.b. Laticrete International, Inc.c. MAPEI Corp.d. Hydromente. (Or approved equivalent)

2.5 POINTING MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide natural color or white cement asrequired to produce mortar color indicated.

1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according toASTM C 114.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Aggregate: ASTM C 144; except with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.

1. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.2. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other durable

stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes.Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in mortar and containing nocarbon black.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may beincorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. Bayer, Industrial Chemicals Division; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.b. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors.c. Solomon Colors; SGS Mortar Colors.d. (Or approved equivalent)

E. Water: Potable.

2.6 STONE ANCHORS AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Fabricate anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

1. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, andwashers; ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) for bolts and ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M) fornuts, Alloy Group 1 (A1).

B. Anchor Support Grids: Roll-formed steel channels, of size and shape required forapplication indicated, formed from galvanized steel sheet not less than 0.108 inch (2.8 mm)thick and complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275).

C. Wire Tiebacks: 0.120-inch- (3.0-mm-) diameter, stainless-steel wire.

D. Direct-Mount Anchoring Systems: Stainless-steel stone anchors designed to be applieddirectly to wall surfaces. System is secured to wall framing, furring, or sheet-metal

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES


reinforcing strips built into wall with self-drilling screws. Anchors fit into kerfs or holes in edges of interior stone facing panels and do not need setting spots.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may beincorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. Halfen Anchoring Systems; Meadow-Burke.b. Hilti.

2.7 STONE ACCESSORIES

A. Temporary Setting Shims: Rigid plastic shims, nonstaining to stone.

B. Setting Shims for Direct-Mount Anchoring Systems: Strips of resilient plastic or neoprene,nonstaining to stone, of thickness needed to prevent point loading of stone on anchors andof depths to suit anchors without intruding into required depths of pointing materials.

2.8 STONE FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Fabricate interior stone facing in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirementsindicated, including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQA's "Specifications forArchitectural Granite."

B. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated and to comply withfabrication and construction tolerances recommended by applicable stone association.

1. Where items are installed with adhesive or where edges of stone is visible in thefinished work, make items uniform in thickness and of identical thickness for eachtype of item; gage back of stone if necessary.

2. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fabricate molded work to produce stone shapes with a uniform profile throughout entire unitlength and with precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping, and matched atjoints between units.

1. Produce moldings with machines having abrasive shaping wheels made to reversecontour of molding shape; do not sculpt moldings.

2. Miter moldings at corners, unless otherwise indicated, with edges of miters slightlyeased at outside corners.

2.9 STONE PANELING AND COLUMN FACING

A. Quirk-miter corners, unless otherwise indicated. Install anchorage in top and bottom bedjoints of corner units.

B. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange panels with veining and other natural markingsto comply with the following requirements:

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES


1. Arrange panels with veining as indicated on Drawings.

2.10 MIXES

A. Spotting Plaster: Stiff mix of molding plaster and water.

B. Mortar: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions toproduce mortar of uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics.

1. Do not use admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride.2. Combine and thoroughly mix materials in a mechanical batch mixer. Discard mortar

when it has reached initial set.

C. Setting Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification; Type N.

D. Pointing Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification; Type N.

1. Pigmented Pointing Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients toproduce color required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10, by weight.

E. Grout: Comply with mixing requirements of referenced ANSI standards and with manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SETTING OF STONE, GENERAL

A. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Use power saws with diamond blades to cutstone. Cut lines straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping.

B. Contiguous Work: Provide reveals and openings as required to accommodate contiguouswork.

C. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Installanchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stonein place. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set stone accurately inlocations indicated, with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships andindicated tolerances.

D. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated.

1. Sealing of expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints is specified in Division 07Section "Joint Sealants."

2. Keep expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints free of plaster, mortar, grout,and other rigid materials.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 3 mm in 2400 mm, (6mm maximum.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES


B. Variation from Level: For lintels, sills, chair rails, horizontal bands, horizontal grooves, andother conspicuous lines, do not exceed 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, 10 mm maximum.

C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1.5 mm or 1/4 of nominaljoint width, whichever is less.

D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 0.8-mmdifference between planes of adjacent units.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF STONE PANELING AND COLUMN FACING

A. Set units firmly against setting spots. Locate setting spots at anchors and spaced not morethan 450 mm apart across back of unit, but provide no fewer than 1 setting spot per 0.18sq. m, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Moisture Exposure: Use portland cement mortar for setting spots where stone isapplied to inside face of exterior walls and at other locations where stone or cavity willbe exposed to moisture.

B. Set units on direct-mount anchoring system with anchors securely attached to stone and tobackup surfaces. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1242.

C. Minimum Anchors: Provide anchors at a maximum of 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. aroundperimeter of interior stone facing panels with a minimum of 4 anchors per panel.

D. Minimum Anchors: Provide a minimum of 4 anchors per panel up to 1.1 sq. m in face area,plus a minimum of 2 additional anchors for each additional 0.7 sq. m.

E. Grout or Point joints after setting.

3.4 GROUTING JOINTS

A. Grout stone to comply with ANSI A108.10.

B. Remove temporary shims before grouting.

C. Tool joints uniformly and smoothly with plastic tool.

3.5 POINTING JOINTS WITH MORTAR

A. Prepare stone-joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing temporary shims, dust,and mortar particles. Where setting spots occur at joints, rake out excess setting mortar orplaster to a depth of not less than 13 mm.

B. Point stone joints by placing pointing mortar in layers not more than 10 mm. Compact eachlayer thoroughly and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Applymortar first to areas where depths are greater than surrounding areas until a uniform depthis formed.

C. Tool joints when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard. Use a round jointer having a diameter 3mm larger than width of joint.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09 - FINISHES



3.6 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND SEALING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean interior stone facing as work progresses. Remove adhesive,grout, mortar, and sealant smears immediately.

B. Clean interior stone facing no fewer than six days after completion of grouting and pointing,using clean water and soft rags or stiff-bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials ormethods that could damage stone. Use procedures recommended by stone producer fortypes of applications indicated.

C. Apply sealer to cleaned interior stone facing in compliance with sealer manufacturer’sinstructions.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect stone facing works during construction period by covering with kraft paper or otheracceptable covering that will not stain or discolor stone.

B. Advise Contractor of additional protection needed to ensure that stone facing works will bewithout damage to deterioration at time of substantial completion.

C. Before inspection for substantial completion, remove protective covering and clean surfacesusing procedures and materials recommended by manufacturer.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 099123: INTERIOR PAINTING

09: FINISHES



SECTION 099123

INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 – GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on thefollowing interior substrates:

1. Concrete.2. Ferrous metals3. Wood.4. Gypsum board.5. Concrete masonry units (CMU).6. Steel.7. Cast iron.8. Galvanized metal.9. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).10. Gypsum board.11. Plaster.


1. Division 01 Section "Sustainable Design Requirements" for additional LEEDrequirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss oftopcoat indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.3. Label each coat of each Sample.4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. MPI (Master Painting Institute) Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI ApprovedProducts List."

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09: FINISHES


2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI ArchitecturalPainting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambienttemperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperaturesare between 10 and 35 deg C.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) asmaterials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describingcontents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 4 liters. of each materialand color applied.

PART 2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Boysen2. Davies Paints Inc.3. Sadolin4. Universal5. Liquid Plastics (anti-bacterial paint)6. C/S Wall Glaze (anti-bacterial paint)

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with oneanother and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application asdemonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09: FINISHES


2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing bymanufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products thatcomply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base,when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the followingchemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are appliedin a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.3. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by

weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or morebenzene rings).

4. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein.b. Acrylonitrile.c. Antimony.d. Benzene.e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.f. Cadmium.g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.k. Diethyl phthalate.l. Dimethyl phthalate.m. Ethylbenzene.n. Formaldehyde.o. Hexavalent chromium.p. Isophorone.q. Lead.r. Mercury.s. Methyl ethyl ketone.t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.u. Methylene chloride.v. Naphthalene.w. Toluene (methylbenzene).x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.y. Vinyl chloride.

C. Colors: As indicated in on drawings.

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer.

1. Basis of Design: PPG Pure Performance2. VOC Content: 0.00% lbs/gal.

2.4 METAL PRIMERS

A. Acrylic Metal Primer

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09: FINISHES


1. Basis of Design: PPG Pitt-Tech2. VOC Content: 0.97 lbs/gal

2.5 LATEX PAINTS

A. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Flat): MPI #143 (Gloss Level 1).

1. Basis of Design: PPG Pure Performance2. VOC Content: 0.00 lbs/gal.

B. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Eggshell): MPI #145 (Gloss Level 3).


C. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Semigloss): MPI #147 (Gloss Level 5).


2.6 ENAMELS

A. Enamel:

1. Basis of Design: PPG Pitt Tech2. VOC Content: 1.87 lbs/gal. (Satin), 1. 66 lbs/gal. (High gloss)

2.7 FLOOR COATINGS

A. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Water Based):

1. Basis of Design: Sherwin-Williams Armorseal2. VOC Content: 1.30 lbs/gal.

PART 3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance withrequirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance ofwork.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisturemeter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.2. Wood: 15 percent.3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09: FINISHES


C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existingfinishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected andsurfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates andconditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI ArchitecturalPainting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to bepainted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, providesurface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved toreinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease,and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers asrequired to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds thatpermitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended inwriting by paint manufacturer.

F. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

G. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dryand sanded smooth.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09: FINISHES



2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposedsurfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipmentor furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similarhinged items to match exposed surfaces.

B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured filmhas a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brushmarks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharplines and color breaks.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materialsfrom Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints bywashing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage towork of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved byArchitect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged ordefaced painted surfaces.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 099600: HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

09: FINISHES



SECTION 099600

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systemson the following substrates:

1. Interior Substrates:

a. Concrete, vertical and horizontal surfaces.b. Concrete masonry units (CMU).

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements andapplication instructions.

B. Samples: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.

C. Product List: For each product indicated, include printout of current "MPI Approved ProductsList" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.



1. Coatings: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and colorapplied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selectionsmade under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set qualitystandards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application ofeach coating system specified in Part 3.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09: FINISHES


a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 9m2b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups ofadditional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the listed in other Part 2articles for the paint category indicated.

2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and are listed in"MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with oneanother and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application asdemonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing bymanufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated.

3. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and,for interior coatings applied at project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorantsadded to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.4. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.5. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.6. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.7. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.8. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.9. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior coatings shall comply with the testing and productrequirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for theTesting of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-ScaleEnvironmental Chambers."

E. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09: FINISHES


2.3 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Block Filler, Epoxy:

1. Davies; Epopatch

2. I-Constech; Epopatch 100

3. MBT, Fixtec

4. Eastkem

2.4 EPOXY COATINGS

A. Epoxy Tank lIning, Gloss:

1. CORD; Epoxy Tank Lining

2. MBT; MBTechline

3. Eastkem

B. Epoxy Floor Coating,:

1. MBT; MB Sealtec

2. I-Constech; UROFLOOR

3. Eastkem

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance withrequirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance ofthe Work.

1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronicmoisture meter as follows:

a. Concrete: 12 percent.b. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.c. Wood: 15 percent.d. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existingfinishes and primers.

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09: FINISHES



1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates andconditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI ArchitecturalPainting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil,grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or applytie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions andrecommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

B. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brushmarks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines andcolor breaks.


A. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage bycleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in anundamaged condition.

B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged ordefaced coated surfaces.

3.5 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Vertical Surfaces:

1. Epoxy System:

a. Prime Coat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.c. Topcoat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.

2. Epoxy-Modified Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Epoxy-modified latex, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #115.b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy-modified latex, interior, gloss (Gloss

Level 6), MPI #115. c. Topcoat: Epoxy-modified latex, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #115.

B. Concrete Substrates, Horizontal Surfaces.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09: FINISHES



1. Epoxy System:

a. Prime Coat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.c. Topcoat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.

2. Pigmented Polyurethane System:

a. Prime Coat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.b. Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss (Gloss

Level 6), MPI #72.c. Topcoat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss (Gloss

Level 6), MPI #72.

3. Pigmented Polyurethane System:

a. Prime Coat: Epoxy, as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.b. Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss (Gloss

Level 6), MPI #72.c. Topcoat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss (Gloss

Level 6), MPI #72.

C. CMU Substrates:

1. Epoxy System:

a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.b. Block Filler: Block filler, epoxy, MPI #116.

c. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.

d. Topcoat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.

2. Epoxy-Modified Latex System:

a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior[, MPI #4].b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy-modified latex, interior, gloss (Gloss

Level 6)[, MPI #115].c. Topcoat: Epoxy-modified latex, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #115.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 099653: ELASTOMERIC COATING

09: FINISHES



SECTION 099653

ELASTOMERIC COATINGS

PART 1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and application of elastomeric coatings to exteriorconcrete wall substrates as shown on the drawings and as specified herein (Refer toArchitectural Plans and Schedule of Finishes).



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and gloss specified


A. QUALIFICATION OF INSTALLER: Provide at least one person who shall be present at alltimes during execution of this portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly experienced inthe installation of the specified products and shall direct all work performed under thisSection.

B. MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATION : Prior to the installation of the work of this Section,secure a visit to the jobsite by a representative of the manufacturer of the waterproofingmaterials used, who shall inspect and shall certify :

1. That the surfaces to which the waterproofing was applied were in conditionsuitable for that application;

2. That the materials installed complied in all respects with the requirement ofthis Section of the specifications;

3. That the materials were installed in complete accordance with themanufacturer's current recommendations.

C. Mockups: Prepare three (3) mockups of each coating system indicated and each color andfinish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and todemonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select three (3) wall surfaces of at least 9 sqm to represent surfaces andconditions for application of each type and texture of elastomeric coating.

2. Final approval of color and texture selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, prepare additional mockups ofadditional color and textures selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09: FINISHES



PART 2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. HITCHINS

B. Tropical Exterior Wall Coating by UKUSA

C. Approved equal

2.2 PRODUCT INFORMATION

A. SEALFLEX elastomeric waterproofing system: water based single component ready mixed,heavy-bodied, high acrylic polymer wall waterproofing membrane. It is flexible, elastic,strong and durable and able to bridge small cracks and tolerate some movement of thesubstrate. (W-2 of Schedule of Finishes)

B. Composed of :

1. SEALFLEX primer, water-based 100% acrylic2. SEALFLEX bodycoat (FORMELAST AF) undiluted3. SEALFLEX TOPCOAT (FORMWALL 620), water-based 100% acrylic


A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide elastomeric finish coatings and crack fillers, primers, and block fillers asapplicable for use within elastomeric finish coatings that are compatible with oneanother and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application asdemonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each material or coat, provide products and spreading rates recommended inwriting by elastomeric-coating manufacturer for use on substrate indicated.

2.4 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Crack Fillers: Elastomeric-coating manufacturer's recommended, factory-formulated crackfillers or sealants, including crack filler primers, compatible with substrate and othermaterials indicated. Use thick heavy coat of FORMELAST AF over cracks.

B. Primer: Elastomeric-coating manufacturer's recommended, factory-formulated, alkali-resistant primer compatible with substrate and other materials indicated.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09: FINISHES



PART 3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance withmanufacturer's requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity, and other conditionsaffecting performance of work.

B. Begin coating only when moisture content of substrate is 12 percent or less when measuredwith an electronic moisture meter.

C. Begin coating no sooner than twenty eight (28) days after substrate is constructed and isvisually dry on both sides.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, light fixtures, andsimilar items already installed that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical orimpossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection beforesurface preparation and coating.

1. After completing coating operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved toreinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. PRIMING: Apply one (1) coat primer to the prepared surface either by brush or roller. UseSEALFLEX primer, water based 100% acrylic primer for substrate such as concrete, hollowblocks, bricks and plaster surface

D. CRACK REPAIR: Fill cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions before coatingsurfaces. Apply a thick heavy coat of Formelast AF (SEALFLEX Bodycoat) over cracks.Application should at least be 50mm wide on both sides of the cracks. If the crack exceeds1.0mm widths, embed a Formelastic Reinforcement into the Formelast AF coat. Allow to dryfor 16 hours before next coat

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply elastomeric coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brushmarks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharplines and color breaks.

C. BODYCOAT: Apply two (2) coats of undiluted SEALFLEX bodycoat (Formelast AF). Allow 8to 16 hours between coats.

D. TOPCOAT: Apply two (2) coats Formwall 620, a decorative topcoat with low-sheen finish forthe SEALFLEX system. It is water based, 100% acrylic, low-sheen topcoat that can be usedfor both interior and exterior applications.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



09: FINISHES



E. PERFORMANCE WARRANTY: Provided that this specification is strictly adhered to and allmaterials are applied by Hitchins approved and trained applicator, working in strictaccordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. In addition, the treated area is backed upwith a protection plan by a well-established international fidelity fund. Minimum of seven (7)years warranty.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 101400 - SIGNAGE

10 - SPECIALTIES



SECTION 101400

SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Dimensional illuminated characters (Exterior Building signage)2. Dimensional illuminated characters (Entrance Lobby)



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.

1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided byothers, and accessories.

2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements and layout for each sign.3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: For each sign type and for each color and texture required.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, andmarked for intended use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, of alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated.

B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommendedby aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least thestrength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32.

C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended byaluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least thestrength and durability properties of Alloy 6063-T5.

D. Brass Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C85200 (high-copper yellow brass).

E. Brass, Yellow, Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy UNS No. C26000.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



10 - SPECIALTIES



F. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C86500 (No. 1 manganese bronze).

G. Bronze Plate: ASTM B 36/B 36M.

H. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M.

I. Steel:

1. Steel Sheet: Electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 591/A 591M, with steel sheet substratecomplying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, exposed.

2. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 316, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

3. Steel Members Fabricated from Plate or Bar Stock: ASTM A 529/A 529M orASTM A 572/A 572M, 42,000-psi (290-MPa) minimum yield strength.

4. For steel exposed to view on completion, provide materials having flat, smoothsurfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials whose surfaces exhibit pitting,seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

J. Fiberglass Sheet: Molded, seamless, thermosetting, glass-fiber-reinforced polyester panelswith a minimum tensile strength of 15,000 psi (103 MPa) when tested according toASTM D 638 and with a minimum flexural strength of 30,000 psi (207 MPa) when testedaccording to ASTM D 790.

K. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).

L. Polycarbonate Sheet: Of thickness indicated, manufactured by extrusion process, coated onboth surfaces with abrasion-resistant coating:

1. Impact Resistance: 16 ft-lbf/in. (854 J/m) per ASTM D 256, Method A.2. Tensile Strength: 9000 lbf/sq. in. (62 MPa) per ASTM D 638.3. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 340,000 lbf/sq. in. (2345 MPa) per ASTM D 790.4. Heat Deflection: 265 deg F (129 deg C) at 264 lbf/sq. in. (1.82 MPa) per

ASTM D 648. 5. Abrasion Resistance: 1.5 percent maximum haze increase for 100 revolutions of a

Taber abraser with a load of 500 g per ASTM D 1044.

M. Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils (0.076 mm)with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior applications.

2.2 PLAQUES 1. See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming

manufacturers and products. Retain one

2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offeringproducts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:

1. ADWRAPS2. EJ Metals.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



10 - SPECIALTIES



C. Aluminum Extrusions: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Finish: Painted2. Thickness: As indicated3. Color(s): As indicated

4. Mounting: Concealed studs, noncorroding for substrates encountered.

D. Fabricated Channel Characters: Form exposed faces and sides of characters to producesurfaces free from warp and distortion. Include internal bracing for stability and attachmentof mounting accessories. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Illuminated Backlighted and Frontlighted Channel Characters: Manufacturer'sstandard LED lighting including transformers, insulators, and other components.Make provisions for servicing and concealing connections to building electricalsystem.

2. Stainless-Steel Sheet: Not less than 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) thick for face and 0.031inch (0.78 mm) thick for returns.

a. Finish: No. 4 Hairline Finish

3. Provide manufacturer's hardware for projection mounting of backlighted channelcharacters at manufacturer’s recommended distance from wall surface.

4. Provide translucent acrylic face sheet of thickness indicated. Attach characters tosheet metal back channels. Provide required to illuminate sign faces evenly.

a. Color: As per Owner’s standard colors.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts forexterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steelor lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, tobe set into concrete or masonry work.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated.

1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices inshop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion ordiscoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux anddress exposed and contact surfaces.

2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude waterpenetration.

3. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will beinconspicuous.

2.6 STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complyingwith SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



10 - SPECIALTIES



B. Factory Priming for Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately aftersurface preparation and pretreatment.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead- andchromate-free, universal primer, selected for resistance to normal atmosphericcorrosion, for compatibility with substrate and field-applied finish paint systemindicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoatsdespite prolonged exposure.

C. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer'sstandard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve aminimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).


A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfacesto produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches.Run grain with long dimension of each piece.

B. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4 finish.

C. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreignmatter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

2.8 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES

A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background and frame colors, providecolored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylicmanufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistantfor five years for application intended.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types describedand complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortionand other defects in appearance.

2. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed throughpredrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secureattachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.

B. Bracket-Mounted Signs: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets, fittings, and hardwarefor mounting signs that project at right angles from walls and ceilings. Attach brackets andfittings securely to walls and ceilings with concealed fasteners and anchoring devices tocomply with manufacturer's written instructions.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



10 - SPECIALTIES



C. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to complywith manufacturer's written instructions for character form, type of mounting, wallconstruction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template toestablish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners.

1. Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface.2. Projected Mounting: Mount characters at projection distance from wall surface

indicated.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

10 - SPECIALTIES



SECTION 102113

TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Phenolic-core toilet compartments configured as Toilet Enclosures and UrinalScreens.



B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, andattachments to other work.

C. Samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Product certificates.




A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the National Building Codeof the Philippines (BP 344) for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHENOLIC-CORE UNITS


1. Willy’s by GS GO Bros. Inc

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced and Floor anchored.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



10 - SPECIALTIES



C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung

D. Door, Panel, Urinal Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid phenolic-core panel materialwith melamine facing on both sides fused to substrate during panel manufacture (notseparately laminated), and with eased and polished edges and no-sightline system. Provideminimum 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick doors and pilasters and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-)thick panels.

E. Pilaster [Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Fabricated from stainless-steel sheet, not less than76mm high, finished to match hardware.

F. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, stainless steel.2. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

G. Phenolic-Panel Finish: Facing sheet of one color and pattern.

1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, withmanufacturer's standard dark-color core.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.

1. Material: Stainless steel.2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold

doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees.3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard latch unit designed for emergency

access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units thatcomply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated asaccessible.

4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper,sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.

5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors.6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with

regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors atcompartments designated as accessible.

B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail withantigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steelfinished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports,leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes atpilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



10 - SPECIALTIES



B. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoringassemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor.Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

C. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoringassemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural supportabove finished ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure withouttransmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops of pilasters to concealanchorage.

D. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistantanchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provideshoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

E. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 610-mm - wide, in-swingingdoors for standard toilet compartments and 914-mm - wide, out-swinging doors with aminimum 813m - wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommendedanchoring devices.

B. Clearances: Maximum 13mm between pilasters and panels; 25mm between panels andwalls.

C. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three bracketsattached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes forwall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer'swritten instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors openapproximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging

doors to return doors to fully closed position.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 102123 - CUBICLES

10 - SPECIALTIES


SECTION 102123 - CUBICLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Curtain tracks and carriers.2. Intravenous (IV) tracks, carriers and bottle holders.3. Curtains.



B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of cubicles, sizes of curtains, number of carriers, anchoragedetails, and accessories.

C. Samples: For each type of curtain.

D. Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Furnish extra materials described below.

1. Curtain Carriers and Track End Caps: Full-size units equal to 3 percent of amountinstalled, but no fewer than 20 units.

2. Curtains: Full-size units equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Curtains: Provide curtain fabrics with the following characteristics:

1. Launderable to a temperature of not less than [160 deg F (71 deg C)] [90 deg F (32

deg C)].2. Flame resistant and identical to those that have passed NFPA 701 when tested by a

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



10 - SPECIALTIES


2.2 CURTAIN AND SUPPORT SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. C/S Curtain Track System: Supertrak2. Meditrak; TSI Group

2.3 CURTAIN SUPPORT SYSTEMS

A. Extruded-Aluminum Curtain Track: Not less than [1-1/4 inches wide by 3/4 inch high (32

mm wide by 19 mm high)] [5/8 inch wide by 1/2 inch high (16 mm wide by 13 mm

high)]; with manufacturer's standard wall thickness.

1. Curved Track: Factory-fabricated, [12-inch- (305-mm-)] radius bends.

2. Finish: Satin anodized3. PVC Curtain Track: Not less than 1-1/4 inches wide by 15/16 inch high (32 mm wide

by 24 mm high).

4. Curved Track: Factory-fabricated, 12-inch- (305-mm-) radius bends.

B. Curtain Track Accessories: Fabricate from same material and with same finish as track.

C. Curtain Carriers: [Two nylon rollers and nylon axle] [One-piece nylon glide] with

[chrome-plated steel] [nylon] [aluminum] hook.

D. Breakaway Curtain Carriers: [One-piece nylon] [Velcro] breakaway curtain carriersdesigned to allow curtains to detach from tracks with a pulling force of no more than 5 lbf(22.2 N).

E. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel.

F. Concealed Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized.

2.4 CURTAINS

A. Cubicle Curtain Fabric: Curtain manufacturer's standard, 100 percent polyester, inherentlyand permanently flame resistant, stain resistant, and antimicrobial.


a. Basic Americanb. C/S


B. Shower Curtain Fabric: Curtain manufacturer's standard, polyester-reinforced vinyl fabric;flame resistant, stain resistant, and antimicrobial.


a. Basic Americanb. C/S

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



10 - SPECIALTIES



C. Curtain Grommets: Nickel-plated brass; spaced not more than 6 inches (152 mm) o.c.;machined into top hem.

D. Mesh Top: Not less than [20-inch- (508-mm-)] [22-inch- (559-mm-)] high mesh top of

No. [50] [40] [42] nylon mesh.

E. Beaded-Chain Curtain Drop: [6 inches (152 mm)] [9 inches (229 mm)] [12 inches (305

mm)] [15 inches (381 mm)] [18 inches (457 mm)] long; nickel-plated steel with aluminumhook.

F. PVC-Strip Curtain Drop: [16 inches (406 mm)] [18 inches (457 mm)] long with chrome-plated steel hook.

G. Curtain Tieback: Nickel-plated brass chain; one at each curtain termination.

H. Fabricate curtains as follows:

1. Width: Equal to track length from which curtain is hung plus 10 percent addedfullness, but not less than 12 inches (305 mm) added fullness.

2. Length: Equal to floor-to-ceiling height, minus depth of track and carrier at top, andminus clearance above the finished floor as follows:

a. Cubicle Curtains: [12 inches (305 mm)] [15 inches (381 mm)].

b. Dressing-Area Curtains: [4 inches (102 mm)] [6 inches (152 mm)].c. Tub Curtains: 6 inches (152 mm).d. Shower Curtains: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

I. Vertical Seams: Not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide, double turned and double stitched.

2.5 IV SUPPORT SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:1. C/S IV track2. Meditrack by TSI Group

B. IV Tracks: Extruded aluminum, not less than 1-1/4 inches wide by 3/4 inch high (32 mmwide by 19 mm high); with manufacturer's standard wall thickness.

1. Curved Track: Factory-fabricated, [12-inch- (305-mm-) radius bends.2. Finish: Satin anodized

3. IV Carriers: Four nylon rollers and [nylon] [steel] [stainless-steel] axles[ with ball

bearings and] with hanger loop fabricated from 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter stainlesssteel.

C. Stationary IV Bottle Holders: 24-inch (610-mm) fixed height with stainless-steel shaft; withfour nonfolding 1/4-inch (6-mm) stainless-steel arms with loops, a stainless-steel bottomloop, and a stainless-steel top loop to attach to carrier.

1. Top Loop: Coated for nonconductivity

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



10 - SPECIALTIES



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install tracks level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Up to 20 feet (6.0 m) in length, provide track fabricated from single continuous length.

1. Curtain Track Mounting: Surface, Suspended, or As indicated on Drawings.2. IV Track Mounting: Surface.

C. Surface-Track Mounting: Fasten tracks to ceilings at intervals recommended bymanufacturer. Fasten tracks to structure at each splice and tangent point of each corner.Center fasteners in track to ensure unencumbered carrier operation.

D. Suspended-Track Mounting: Install track with manufacturer's standard tubular aluminumsuspended supports at intervals and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Fastensupports to structure. Provide supports at each splice and tangent point of each corner.Secure ends of track to wall with flanged fittings or brackets.

E. Track Accessories: Install splices, end caps, connectors, end stops, coupling and joiningsleeves, and other accessories as required for a secure and operational installation.

F. IV Bottle Holders: Unless otherwise indicated, install one IV hook on each IV track and hangone IV hanger.

G. Curtain Carriers: Provide curtain carriers adequate for 6-inch (152-mm) spacing along fulllength of curtain plus an additional carrier.

H. Curtains: Hang curtains on each curtain track. Secure with curtain tieback.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 102600 – WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

10 - SPECIALTIES



SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Wall guards.2. Impact-resistant handrails.3. Corner guards.


A. Structural Performance: Provide handrails capable of withstanding the effects of gravityloads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.2. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.



B. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit. Include sections, details,and attachments to other work.

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structuralanalysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible fortheir preparation.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches(300 mm) long.


A. Material certificates.

B. Material test reports.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.



PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



10 - SPECIALTIES




A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines,ICC/ANSI A117.1 and the National Building Code of the Philippines.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair orreplace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials orworkmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures.b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. PVC Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout.

1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356 J/m) of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.

2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543, ASTM D 1308]3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635.4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Polycarbonate Plastic Sheet: ASTM D 6098, S-PC01, Class 1 or 2, abrasion resistant; witha minimum impact-resistance rating of 15 ft-lbf/in. (800 J/m) of notch when tested accordingto ASTM D 256, Test Method A.

C. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use andfinish indicated, but with not less than strength and durability properties specified inASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) for Alloy 6063-T5.

D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws,bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fastenerswhere exposed to view.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



10 - SPECIALTIES



E. Adhesive: As recommended by impact-resistant plastic wall protection manufacturer and

with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24).

F. Adhesive: As recommended by impact-resistant plastic wall protection manufacturer andthat complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department ofHealth Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions fromVarious Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.2 WALL GUARDS

A. Crash Rail <CR>: Heavy-duty assembly consisting of continuous snap-on plastic coverinstalled over concealed retainer system; designed to withstand impacts.


a. Pawling Corporation

2. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.100-inch (2.5-mm) wall thickness; indimensions and profiles indicated on Drawings.

a. Surface: Uniformb. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Continuous Retainer: Minimum 0.080-inch- (2.0-mm-) thick, one-piece, extrudedaluminum.

4. Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-absorbing clips designed for heavy-duty performance.

5. Bumper: Continuous rubber or vinyl bumper cushion(s).6. End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; matching color cover;

field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.7. Accessories: Concealed splices and mounting hardware.8. Mounting: [Surface mounted directly to wall] [Reveal mounted on bumper cushion(s)]

[Extended mounting on injection-molded plastic mounting brackets].

B. Bumper Rail (BG) Assembly consisting of continuous snap-on plastic cover installed overconcealed, continuous retainer; designed to withstand impacts.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:a. Pawling Corporation


a. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Continuous Retainer: Minimum 0.080-inch- (2.0-mm-) thick, one-piece, extrudedaluminum.

4. Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-absorbing clips.5. Bumper: Continuous rubber or vinyl bumper cushion(s).

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



10 - SPECIALTIES



6. End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; matching color cover;field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.

7. Accessories: Concealed splices and mounting hardware.8. Mounting: [Surface mounted directly to wall] [Reveal mounted on bumper cushions]

[Extended mounting on injection-molded plastic mounting brackets].

2.3 HANDRAILS

A. Impact-Resistant Plastic Handrails (CR/HR) Assembly consisting of snap-on plastic coverinstalled over continuous retainer.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:a. Pawling Corporation

2. Cover: Minimum 0.100-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick, extruded rigid plastic; in dimensionsand profiles indicated on Drawings.

a. Single Handrail: Cylindrical tube profile cover with continuous retainer; withmounting brackets supporting bottom of rail.

b. Bumper Rail: Cover with sculpted with contoured thumb recess on front side;with 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter gripping surface and finger recess on backside; supported by concealed, continuous retainer and extended mountingbrackets.

1) Bumper Surface: Smooth

c. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

3. Retainer: Minimum 0.080-inch- (2.0-mm-) thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum.4. Mounting Bracket: Extended mounting on [injection-molded plastic] [anodized-

aluminum mounting brackets. 5. End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; matching color cover;

field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.6. Accessories: Concealed splices, cushions, and mounting hardware.

2.4 CORNER GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards (CG) Assembly consisting of snap-onplastic cover installed over continuous retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.




PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



10 - SPECIALTIES



3. Retainer: [Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum][One-piece extruded plastic].

4. Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-absorbing clips.5. Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching cover;

field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.

B. Fire-Rated, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards (CG) Assembly consisting of snap-on plasticcover that is flush with adjacent wall surface, installed over continuous retainer andintumescent fire barrier; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turnto match wall condition; full wall height.



2. Fire Rating: Same rating as wall in which corner guard is installed; UL listed andlabeled according to UL 2079.



4. Retainer: Minimum 0.070-inch- (1.8-mm-) thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum.

5. Aluminum Cove Base: Nominal 4 inches (100 mm) high.

C. Surface-Mounted, Opaque-Plastic Corner Guards (JG) Jamb Guard: Fabricated from PVCplastic, acrylic-modified vinyl sheet or opaque polycarbonate sheet; with formed edges;fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition; in dimensions and profilesindicated on Drawings.



2. Mounting: Countersunk screws through factory-drilled mounting holes3. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line withoutdistortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that mightbe visible in the finished Work.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



10 - SPECIALTIES


1. Install impact-resistant wall protection units in locations and at mounting heightsindicated on Drawings.

2. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for acomplete installation.

a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads.b. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet (6.1 m), splice

aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, butno closer than 12 inches (305 mm).

c. Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams.

B. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using astandard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.

C. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing bymanufacturer.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 102800 – TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

10 - SPECIALTIES



SECTION 102800

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories.2. Warm-air dryers.3. Custodial accessories.



B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room ofeach accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.2. Identify products using designations indicated.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.




A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees toreplace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials orworkmanship within specified warranty period.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



10 - SPECIALTIES


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES


B. Basis-of-Design Product: GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick WashroomEquipment, Inc

C. Other acceptable manufacturers:

1. American Specialties, Inc.2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

D. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser (Designated as PH-1 in the Plumbing Fixture Schedule):

1. Basis-of-Design Product: GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of BobrickWashroom Equipment, Inc.

2. Refer to attached Schedule of Plumbing Fixtures and Accessories

E. Paper Towel Dispenser with Waste Receptacle (Designated as PTD-1 in the PlumbingFixture Schedule)


2. Refer to attached Schedule of Plumbing Fixtures and Accessories.

F. Liquid-Soap Dispenser (Designated as SD-1 and SD-2 in the Plumbing Fixture Schedule.



G. Grab Bar (Designated as GB-1 in the Plumbing Fixture Schedule)



H. Robe Hook (Designated as RH-1 in the Plumbing Fixture Schedule)



2.2 WARM-AIR DRYERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Sloan:

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



10 - SPECIALTIES


B. Other acceptable Manufacturers:


C. Warm-Air Dryer (Designated as HD-1 in the Plumbing Fixture Schedule)

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Sloan, Model EHD-2402. Refer to attached Schedule of Plumbing Fixtures and Accessories.

2.3 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick WashroomEquipment, Inc.


B. Combination Utility Shelf and Mop and Broom Holder (Designated as MPS-1 in the PlumbingFixture Schedule):

1. Basis-of-Design Product: GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of BobrickWashroom Equipment, Inc

2. Description: Refer to attached Plumbing Fixture Schedule.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six (6) keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fastenersappropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install unitslevel, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when testedaccording to ASTM F 446.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 123200 – MANUFACTURED CASEWORK

12 - FURNISHINGS


SECTION 123200

MANUFACTURED CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate-faced wood cabinets of stock design.2. Plastic-laminate countertops.3. Solid-Surfacing materials.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.




C. Samples: For cabinet finishes and for each type of top material indicated.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody byan FSC-accredited certification body.

B. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes, configurations, and finish material ofmanufactured wood casework by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers.Other manufacturers' casework of similar sizes and door and drawer configurations, of samefinish material, and complying with the Specifications may be considered. Refer toDivision 01 Section "Product Requirements."

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair orreplace components of manufactured wood casework that fail in materials or workmanshipwithin specified warranty period.


a. Delamination of components or other failures of glue bond.b. Warping of components.c. Failure of operating hardware.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



12 - FURNISHINGS


d. Deterioration of finishes.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into theWork include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Plastic-Laminate-Faced Manufactured Casework:a. DSL Manufacturing and Industrial Inc..b. Dunwoody and Madisonc. CNEXd. Grace Park Industries


A. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate manufactured wood casework, including countertops, withadhesives and composite wood products containing no urea formaldehyde.

B. Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives and composite wood products shall comply with thetesting and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "StandardPractice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent forsoftwood.

D. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, either veneer core or particleboard core unless otherwiseindicated.

E. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.

F. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.

G. MDF: ANSI A208.2, [Grade 130]

H. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered.

I. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.

J. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or MDF finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.

K. Edgebanding for Plastic Laminate: Plastic laminate matching adjacent surfaces

L. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240 or ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 satin finish.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



12 - FURNISHINGS



M. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying withISSFA-2.


a. Formica Corporation.b. Samsung; Cheil Industries Inc.c. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

2.3 CABINET MATERIALS

A. Exposed Cabinet Materials:

1. Plastic Laminate: Grade HGS.

B. Semiexposed Cabinet Materials:

1. Plastic Laminate: Grade VGS.

a. Provide plastic laminate for semiexposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.b. Provide plastic laminate for interior faces of doors and drawer fronts.

2. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Provide thermoset decorative panels for semiexposedsurfaces unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 DESIGN, COLOR, AND FINISH

A. Design: Provide manufactured wood casework based on Architect’s details.

B. Plastic-Laminate Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Match Architect’s Sample.

C. PVC Edgebanding Color: Match Architect’s sample.

D. Solid-Surfacing Material Colors and Patterns: Match Architects’s Sample.

2.5 CASEWORK HARDWARE

A. Hardware, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard satin-finish commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware.

1. Use threaded metal or plastic inserts with machine screws for fastening toparticleboard except where hardware is through-bolted from back side.

B. Butt Hinges: Stainless-steel, semiconcealed, 5-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with antifriction bearings and rounded tips.

C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, Type B01602[, self-closing].

D. Pulls: Solid stainless-steel wire pulls.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



12 - FURNISHINGS



E. Pulls: Semirecessed plastic pulls.

F. Door Catches: [Nylon-roller spring catch] [

G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, Type B05091.

1. Box Drawer Slides: [Grade 1]2. File Drawer Slides: [Grade 1HD-100]3. Pencil Drawer Slides: [Grade 2]

H. Drawer and Hinged Door Locks: Cylindrical (cam)type, 5-pin tumbler, complying withBHMA A156.11, Grade 1.

2.6 COUNTERTOPS

A. Countertops, General: Provide smooth, clean exposed tops and edges in uniform plane freeof defects. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch (25 mm) over base cabinets.

B. Plastic-Laminate Tops: Plastic-laminate sheet, shop bonded to both sides of [3/4-inch (19-mm)] [1-1/8-inch (29-mm)] plywood or particleboard.

1. Plastic Laminate for Flat Tops: Grade HGS2. Plastic Laminate for Formed Tops: Grade HGP.3. Plastic Laminate for Backing: Grade BKL.4. Provide plastic-laminate edgings of the same material as top on front edge of top, on

top edges of backsplashes and end splashes, and on ends of tops and splashes.5. Construct top and backsplash from one piece of plastic laminate with rolled edges and

coved intersection. Where indicated, provide separate end splashes fitted to top.6. Use exterior plywood or exterior glue particleboard for countertops containing sinks.

C. Solid-Surfacing-Material Tops: 1-3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, solid-surfacing material.

1. Front: 50mm Bullnose2. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, solid-surfacing material; [slightly eased at

edge] [beveled edge] [radiused edge with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) radius].

2.7 WALL SHELVING

A. Plastic-Laminate Shelving: Plastic-laminate sheet, Grade HGL or HGP, shop bonded toboth sides of [particleboard] [plywood]. Sand surfaces to which plastic laminate is to bebonded.

1. Shelf Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm)2. Edge Treatment: Finish both edges with solid-wood edging applied before plastic

laminate.

B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: [Zinc-plated] [Powder-coated] steel standards and shelf brackets, complying with BHMA A156.9, Types B04102 and B04112, surface mounted.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



12 - FURNISHINGS



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CASEWORK INSTALLATION

A. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Wheremanufactured wood casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe foraccurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.

B. Base Cabinets: Set cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust subtops within 1/16 inch (1.5mm) of a single plane. Fasten cabinets to masonry or framing, wood blocking, orreinforcements in walls and partitions with fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Boltadjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform. Align similar adjoining doorsand drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

C. Wall Cabinets: Hang cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust fronts and bottoms within1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of a single plane. Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, or framing,blocking, or reinforcements in walls or partitions. Align similar adjoining doors to a toleranceof 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

D. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind.Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF TOPS

A. Field Jointing: Where possible make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels,splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to bejoined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locatefield joints where shown on Shop Drawings.

1. Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping deviceslocated within 6 inches (150 mm) of front and back edges and at intervals notexceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Tighten according to manufacturer's writteninstructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints.

B. Secure tops to cabinets with Z- or L-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or morefasteners at each front, end, and back.

C. Secure [backsplashes] [and] [end splashes] to walls with adhesive.

D. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or anotherpermanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SHELVING

A. Securely fasten shelf standards to masonry, partition framing, wood blocking, orreinforcements in partitions.

B. Install shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves.

C. Install shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



12 - FURNISHINGS



3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiledareas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

B. Protection: Provide 6-mil (0.15-mm) plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering overcountertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches (1220 mm)o.c. Remove protection at Substantial Completion.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 123570 – HEALTHCARE CASEWORK

12 – FURNISHINGS



SECTION 123570 - HEALTHCARE CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Stainless-steel medical casework.2. Stainless-steel countertops and integral sinks.3. Stainless-steel shelving.


A. Delegated Design: Design healthcare casework, including comprehensive engineeringanalysis by a qualified professional engineer, using seismic performance requirementsindicated.

B. Seismic Performance: Provide healthcare casework, including attachments to other work,capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to[SEI/ASCE 7]

1. Design earthquake spectral response acceleration, short period (Sds) for Project is

<Insert value>.2. Component Importance Factor is 1.5.




C. Samples: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For healthcare casework indicated to comply with seismicperformance requirements, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualifiedprofessional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain healthcare casework through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes and configurations of healthcare caseworkby referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' metalmedical casework of similar sizes, similar door and drawer configurations, and complyingwith the Specifications may be considered. Refer to Division 01 Section "ProductRequirements."

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



12 – FURNISHINGS



C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering productsthat may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. EJ Metals (fabricator)2. CNEX (Fabricator)3. Elite (Fabricator)4. Getinge USA.

2.2 CASEWORK MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled commercial steel sheet, complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M;matte finish; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

C. Nominal Stainless-Steel Thicknesses for Stainless-Steel Medical Casework:

1. Sides, Ends, Fixed Backs, Bottoms, Cabinet Tops, Soffits, and Items Not OtherwiseIndicated: 0.050 inch (1.27). Bottoms may be 0.038 inch (0.95 mm) if reinforced.

2. Back Panels, Doors, Drawer Fronts and Bodies, and Shelves: 0.038 inch (0.95 mm)except 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) for unreinforced shelves more than 36 inches (900 mm)long.

3. Intermediate Horizontal Rails, Center Posts, Tubular Legs, and Top Gussets: 0.062inch (1.59 mm).

D. Glass for Glazed Doors: Clear float glass complying with ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1,Quality-Q3; not less than 6.0 mm thick.

E. Glass for Glazed Doors: Clear tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1048, Kind FT,Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality-Q3; not less than 5.0 mm thick.

F. Glass for Glazed Doors: Clear laminated tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1172,Kind LT, Condition A, Type I, Class I, Quality-Q3; with 2 lites not less than 3.0 mm thick andwith clear, polyvinyl butyral interlayer.

G. Pegboard: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) perforated hardboard, complying with AHA A135.4, Class 1tempered; with painted finish sealing faces, edges, and perimeter of holes.

H. Pegboard: Perforated stainless-steel sheet, 0.050-inch (1.27-mm) nominal thickness.

I. Pegboard: Perforated steel sheet, 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal thickness, with powder-coated finish.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



12 – FURNISHINGS


J. Insulation for Warming Cabinets: Semi-rigid, glass-fiber board insulation complying withASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB.

2.3 CABINET FABRICATION

A. General: Assemble and finish units at point of manufacture. Use precision dies forinterchangeability of like-size drawers, doors, and similar parts. Perform assembly onprecision jigs to provide units that are square. Reinforce units with angles, gussets, andchannels. Integrally frame and weld to form a dirt and vermin-resistant enclosure. Maintainuniform clearance around door and drawer fronts of 1/16 to 3/32 inch (1.5 to 2.4 mm).

B. Metal Flush Doors: Outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with full-heightchannel reinforcements at center of door. Fill doors with noncombustible, sound-deadeningmaterial.

C. Glazed Doors: Hollow-metal stiles and rails of similar construction as flush doors, with glassheld in resilient channels or gasket material.

D. Metal Drawers: Fronts made from outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with noraw metal edges at top.

E. Metal Shelves: Front, back, and ends formed down, with edges returned horizontally at frontand back to form reinforcing channels. Provide clips or other means to support shelves andallow height of shelves to be adjusted in increments of not more than 2 inches (50 mm).

F. Filler Strips: Provide as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, andindicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as cabinets andwith hemmed or flanged edges.

G. Trim Flanges: Formed metal trim fabricated from same material and with same finish ascabinets. Provide at perimeter of recessed cabinets.

2.4 SPECIALTY CABINETS

A. Narcotics Cabinets: Construct of stainless steel as individual, freestanding units withfinished sides and top and double-walled bottom. Provide with double-pan flush outer doorand 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) nominal thickness, single-pan inner door, both with locks, eachindividually keyed and not master keyed.

B. Specimen Pass-Through Cabinets: Construct of stainless steel as through-wall units withdouble-walled construction and smooth interior. Provide with interlocking hardware thatprevents each door from being opened when the other door is open. Provide withremovable stainless-steel spill tray and trim flanges for both faces.

C. Warming Cabinets: Recessed units covered on back, top, and sides with 1-inch- (25-mm-)thick insulation. Insulate door and equip with heat-resistant gasket. Provide withthermostatically controlled heating system to maintain temperature within 10 deg F (5.5deg C) of temperature setting that can be varied from 97 to 160 deg F (36 to 71 deg C).

1. Equip units with [fan-forced electric] [steam] heating system.

D. Desk Units: Recessed units with sloped stainless-steel writing surface, [magnetic stainless-steel] [white marker board] [tack board] back panel, and built-in fluorescent light fixture.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



12 – FURNISHINGS


2.5 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISH

A. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional satin finish matching No. 4 finishwith no evidence of welds and free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension ofeach piece.

B. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreignmatter and leave surfaces clean.

2.6 CABINET HARDWARE

A. General: Provide healthcare casework manufacturer's standard, commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware complying with requirements indicated for each type.

B. Hinges: Stainless-steel 5-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, withantifriction bearings and hospital tips. Provide 2 for doors 48 inches (1200 mm) high or lessand 3 for doors more than 48 inches (1200 mm) high.

C. Continuous Hinges: Stainless-steel continuous hinges complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1. Provide for narcotics cabinets and specimen pass-through cabinets.

D. Hinged Door and Drawer Pulls: stainless-steel, back-mounted pulls.

E. Sliding Door Pulls: Stainless-steel or chrome-plated flush pulls.

F. Door Catches: Nylon-roller spring catches. Provide 2 catches on doors more than 48inches (1200 mm) high.

G. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, epoxy-coated steel or zinc-plated steel, self-closing, ball-bearing drawer slides; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; complyingwith BHMA A156.9, Type B05091.

1. Provide [Grade 1] [Grade 1HD-100] for drawers not more than 6 inches (150 mm)high and 24 inches (600 mm) wide.

2. Provide [Grade 1HD-100] [Grade 1HD-200] for drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm)high or 24 inches (600 mm) wide.

3. Standard Duty (Grade 1): Full extension type.4. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 or Grade 1HD-200): Full-overtravel-extension type.

H. Locks: Cam or half-mortise type; brass with chrome-plated finish; complying with BHMA A156.11, Type E07281, E07261, E07111, or E07021.

1. Provide minimum of two (2) keys per lock and two (2) master keys.2. Provide locks on all drawers and doors.3. Keying: Key each lock separately

2.7 STAINLESS-STEEL [COUNTERTOPS] [SHELVES] [AND] [SINKS]

A. Countertops: Provide units with smooth surfaces in uniform plane free of defects. Easeexposed edges and corners. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch (25 mm) over basecabinets.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



12 – FURNISHINGS


1. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 316, not less than 0.062-inch(1.59-mm) nominal thickness, with No. 4 directional satin finish.

2. Extend top down 1 inch (25 mm) at edges with a 1/2-inch (13-mm) return flange underframe. Apply heavy coating of heat-resistant, sound-deadening mastic toundersurface.

3. Form backsplash coved to and integral with top surface.4. Provide rolled edge unless otherwise indicated.5. Provide raised (marine) edge around perimeter of countertops containing sinks; pitch

two ways to sink to provide drainage without channeling or grooving.6. Reinforce underside of countertop with channels or use thicker metal sheet where

necessary to insure rigidity without deflection.7. Weld shop-made joints.8. Fabricate units for installation without field-made joints.9. Fabricate units for field assembly, where necessary, using [welded joints] [tight-fitting

butt-joints mechanically bolted through continuous channels welded to underside atedges of joined ends].[ Locate field-made joints only where indicated.]

10. Where stainless-steel sinks or cup sinks occur in stainless-steel countertops, factoryweld into one integral unit.

11. After fabricating and welding, grind surfaces smooth and polish as needed to produceuniform, directionally textured finish with no evidence of welds and free of crossscratches. Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove embedded foreign matter and leavesurfaces clean.

B. Wall-Mounted Shelves: Made from stainless-steel sheet, ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304,not less than 0.050-inch (1.27-mm) nominal thickness, with No. 4 directional satin finish.Weld shop-made joints. Fold down front edge 3/4 inch (19 mm); fold up back edge 3 inches(75 mm). Provide integral stiffening brackets, formed by folding up ends 3/4 inch (19 mm)and welding to upturned front and back edges. After fabricating, grind welds smooth andpolish as needed to produce uniform, directionally textured finish with no evidence of weldsand free of cross scratches. Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove embedded foreignmatter and leave surfaces clean.

C. Sinks: Provide sizes indicated or healthcare casework manufacturer's closest standard sizeof equal or greater volume as approved by Architect.

1. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 316, not less than 0.050-inch(1.27-mm) nominal thickness. Fabricate with corners rounded and coved to at least5/8-inch (16-mm) radius. Slope sink bottoms to outlet. Provide double-wallconstruction for sink partitions with top edge rounded to at least 1/2-inch (13-mm)diameter. Provide continuous butt-welded joints After fabricating and welding, grindsurfaces smooth and polish as needed to produce uniform finish with no evidence ofwelds and free of cross scratches. Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove embeddedforeign matter and leave surfaces clean.

2. Punch holes for fittings at factory.3. Provide with stainless-steel strainers and tailpieces, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) unless

otherwise indicated.4. Where indicated, provide stainless-steel overflow of standard beehive or open-top

design with separate stainless-steel strainer. Height 2 inches (50 mm) less than sinkdepth.

5. Apply 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick coating of heat-resistant, sound-deadening mastic toundersink surfaces.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



12 – FURNISHINGS


2.8 WATER AND COMPRESSED-AIR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Service Fittings: Provide units that comply with SEFA 7, "Laboratory and Hospital Fixtures--Recommended Practices." Provide fittings complete with washers, locknuts, nipples, andother installation accessories. Include wall and deck flanges, escutcheons, handle extensionrods, and similar items.

B. Materials: Fabricated from cast or forged red brass unless otherwise indicated.

1. Reagent-Grade Water Service Fittings: Polypropylene, PVC, or PVDF for parts incontact with water.

C. Finish: Chromium plated.

D. Water Valves and Faucets: Provide units complying with ASME A112.18.1, with renewableseats, designed for working pressure up to 80 psig (550 kPa).

1. Vacuum Breakers: Provide ASSE 1035 vacuum breakers on water fittings withserrated outlets.

2. Aerators: Provide aerators on water fittings that do not have serrated outlets.3. Self-Closing Valves: Provide self-closing valves where indicated.4. Handles: Provide three- or four-arm, forged-brass handles for valves unless

otherwise indicated.

E. Needle Valves for Compressed Air: Provide units with renewable, self-centering, floatingcones and renewable seats of stainless steel or Monel metal, with removable serratedoutlets.

1. Provide units designed for working pressure up to [60 psig (410 kPa)] [100 psig (690

kPa)] [125 psig (860 kPa)].2. Handles: Provide knurled molded plastic handles.

F. Service-Outlet Identification: Provide color-coded plastic discs with embossed identification,secured to each service-fitting handle to be tamper resistant. Comply with SEFA 7 for colorsand embossed identification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS AND SHELVES

A. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where healthcarecasework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, withfasteners concealed where practical.

B. Recessed Cabinets: Set cabinets in openings and fasten to partition framing, woodblocking, or reinforcements in partitions with fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Boltadjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.

C. Base Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements inpartitions with fasteners spaced not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Bolt adjacentcabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



12 – FURNISHINGS



D. Wall Cabinets: Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, partition framing, blocking, orreinforcements in partitions. Fasten each cabinet through back, near top, at not less than 24inches (600 mm) o.c.

E. Wall-Mounted Shelves: Fasten to masonry, partition framing, blocking, or reinforcements inpartitions. Fasten each shelf through upturned back edge at not less than 24 inches (600mm) o.c.

F. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises.

G. Adjust healthcare casework and hardware so doors and drawers align and operate smoothlywithout warp or bind and contact points meet accurately. Lubricate operating hardware asrecommended by manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS

A. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane with flush joints and with internal supportsplaced to prevent deflection. Locate joints only where shown on Shop Drawings.

B. Field-Made Joints: Provide welded joints in tops. Grind and polish surfaces to produceuniform, directionally textured finish with no evidence of welds and free of cross scratches.Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces clean.

C. Field-Made Joints: Provide tight-fitting joints in tops using adhesives and fastenersrecommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-siteprocessing of top and edge surfaces is not required.

D. Fastening: Secure countertops to cabinets with Z-type fasteners or equivalent, using two ormore fasteners at each cabinet front, end, and back.

E. Provide chemical-resistant, permanently elastic sealing compound for closures at juncturesof top, curb, and splash with walls as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Sections for installing water and compressed-airservice fittings.

B. Install fittings according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. Setbases and flanges of sink- and countertop-mounted fittings in sealant recommended bymanufacturer of sink or countertop material. Securely anchor fittings to healthcare caseworkunless otherwise indicated.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiledareas to match original factory finish as approved by Architect.

B. Protect countertop surfaces during construction with 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick polyethylene orother suitable water-resistant covering. Tape to underside of countertop at minimum of 48inches (1200 mm) o.c.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



12 – FURNISHINGS




PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 123640 – STONE COUNTERTOPS

12 – FURNISHINGS



SECTION 123640

STONE COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes stone countertops.


A. Product Data: For each variety of stone

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each stone type indicated.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone from a single quarry withresources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

1. Make stone slabs available for Architect to examine for appearance characteristics.Architect will select aesthetically acceptable slabs.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive stone countertops by fieldmeasurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GRANITE

A. Granite: Comply with ASTM C 615.



1. Liberty Stile

2. Multi-Rich

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



12 – FURNISHINGS



D. Finish: Polished finish

2.2 ADHESIVES, GROUT, SEALANTS, AND STONE ACCESSORIES

A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3[.][, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or lesswhen calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).][, that complies withthe testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various SourcesUsing Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."]



a. Bonsal, W. R. Company.b. Bonstone Materials Corporation.c. C-Cure.d. Custom Building Products.e. Laticrete International, Inc.f. MAPEI Corp.g. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, chemical-resistant, water-cleanable, tile-setting and -grouting epoxy.



a. Boiardi Products Corporation.b. W. R. Bonsal Company.c. Bostik Findley Inc.d. C-Cure.e. Custom Building Products.f. Laticrete International, Inc.g. MAPEI Corp.h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.i. TEC Incorporated; H. B. Fuller Company.

C. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated belowthat complies with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and willnot stain the stone it is applied to.

1. Single-component, [neutral] -curing silicone sealant2. Color: Clear

3. Sealants shall have a VOC content of [250] <Insert value> g/L or less whencalculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).


D. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physicalproperties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



12 – FURNISHINGS





a. Bostik Findley Inc.b. Custom Building Products.c. Hillyard, Inc.d. HMK Stone Care System.e. Miracle Sealants Company.f. Stone Care International Inc.g. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

2.3 STONE FABRICATION

A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, andstarts that could impair structural integrity or function.

B. Fabricate stone countertops in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirementsindicated, including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated.2. Fabricate molded edges with machines having abrasive shaping wheels made to

reverse contour of edge profile to produce uniform shape throughout entire length ofedge.

3. Finish exposed faces of stone to comply with requirements indicated. Providematching finish on exposed edges of countertops, splashes, and cutouts.

C. Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual."

D. Nominal Thickness: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than 3/4 inch (20 mm). Gagebacks to provide units of identical thickness.

E. Splashes: Provide 3/4-inch- (20-mm-) thick [backsplashes] [and] [end splashes], unlessotherwise indicated.

F. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints.

G. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field, with joints at locations indicatedand as follows:

1. Grouted Joints: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in width.2. Sealant-Filled Joints: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in width.

H. Cutouts and Holes:

1. Undercounter Fixtures: Make cutouts for undercounter fixtures in shop usingtemplate or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, evencurves.

2. Counter-Mounted Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings forcounter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutoutlocations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical.

3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers,and similar items.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



12 – FURNISHINGS



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS

A. General: Install countertops over plywood subtops with full spread of water-cleanable epoxyadhesive.

B. General: Install countertops by adhering to supports with water-cleanable epoxy adhesive.

C. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Shimand adjust stone to locations indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edgesand faces aligned according to established relationships.

D. Space joints with 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) gap for filling with [grout] [sealant]. Use temporaryshims to ensure uniform spacing.

1. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertopsare properly aligned and joints are of specified width.

E. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts toprevent damage while cutting. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Makecutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unlessbeveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.

F. Install backsplash and end splash by adhering to wall with water-cleanable epoxy adhesive.Leave 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) gap between countertop and splash for filling with sealant. Usetemporary shims to ensure uniform spacing.

G. Grout joints to comply with ANSI A108.10. Remove temporary shims before grouting. Toolgrout uniformly and smoothly with plastic tool.

H. Apply sealant to [joints] [and] [gaps specified for filling with sealant]; comply with Division 07Section "Joint Sealants." Remove temporary shims before applying sealant.


A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean countertops as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout,mortar, and sealant smears immediately.

B. Clean stone countertops not less than six days after completion of sealant installation usingclean water and soft rags. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaningcompounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damagestone.

C. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written instructions.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 123661 – SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS

12 – FURNISHINGS


SECTION 123661 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid-surface-material countertops [and backsplashes].2. Quartz agglomerate countertops [and backsplashes].


A. Product Data: For countertop materials.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles,methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS

A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:

1. Front: [Straight, slightly eased at top] [Beveled] [3/4-inch (19-mm) bullnose] [Radiusedge with apron, 2 inches (50 mm) high with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) radius] [1-1/2-inch(38-mm) laminated bullnose] [1-inch (25-mm) laminated bullnose]

2. Backsplash: [Straight, slightly eased at corner] [Beveled] [Radius edge with 3/8-inch(9.5-mm) radius].

3. Endsplash: [Matching backsplash] [None].

B. Countertops: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, solid surface material with front edge built up withsame material.

C. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, solid surface material

2.2 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:

1. Front: [Straight, slightly eased at top] [Beveled] [3/4-inch (19-mm) bullnose] [Radiusedge with apron, 2 inches (50 mm) high with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) radius] [1-1/2-inch(38-mm) laminated bullnose] [1-inch (25-mm) laminated bullnose]

2. Backsplash: [Straight, slightly eased at corner] [Beveled] [Radius edge with 3/8-inch(9.5-mm) radius].

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



12 – FURNISHINGS


3. Endsplash: [Matching backsplash] [None].

B. Countertops: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, quartz agglomerate with front edge built up withsame material].

C. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, quartz agglomerate

2.3 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Certified Wood Materials: Fabricate countertops with wood and wood-based productsproduced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification bodyto comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide products that comply with the testing andproduct requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice forthe Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-ScaleEnvironmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.

C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, [Grade M-2] [Grade M-2-Exterior Glue] [, made with binder

containing no urea formaldehyde].

D. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touchsanded.

E. Adhesives: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of theCalifornia Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of VolatileOrganic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

F. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying withANSI SS1.


a. Samsung Chemical USA, Inc. (Staron)b. Corianc. Wilsonart International.

2. Type: Provide Standard Type unless Special Purpose Type is indicated.

3. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

G. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with amatrix of filled plastic resin and complying with the "Physical Characteristics of Materials"Article of ANSI SS1.


a. Liberty Stileb. Multi-rich

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



12 – FURNISHINGS


2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside ofcountertop. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, formseams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth,remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 142100 – ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT



SECTION 142100

ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes electric traction passenger and service elevators.


A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes,and similar information.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at eachlanding, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships withother construction, and locations of equipment.

2. Indicate maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points ofsupport, and maximum and average power demands.

C. Samples: For exposed finishes.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For elevator equipment, accessories, and components,from manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, andmachine room, control closet layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electricalservice including standby power generator, as shown and specified, are adequate forelevator system being provided.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, andmaintenance manuals.

B. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authoritieshaving jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.

C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installerto Owner, in the form of a standard FIVE (5) year maintenance agreement, starting on dateinitial maintenance service is concluded.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :






1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace elevator work that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 2 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. KONE Inc.2. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.3. Schindler Elevator Corp.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 407 in the U.S. Architectural &Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and withICC A117.1.

C. Seismic Performance: Elevator system shall withstand the effects of earthquake motionsdetermined according to ASCE/SEI 7, National Structural Code of the Philippines and shallcomply with elevator safety requirements for seismic risk Zone 2 or greater inASME A17.1/CSA B44.

1. Affected peak velocity acceleration (Av) for Project's location is greater than or equalto 0.20 (seismic risk Zones 3 and 4)]

2. Provide earthquake equipment required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44.3. Provide seismic switch required by ASCE/SEI 7.4. Design earthquake fundamental time period for Project is 0.8sec5. Project Seismic Design Category: A6. Elevator Component Importance Factor: 1.5

2.3 ELEVATORS

A. Elevator System, General: Manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Unless otherwiseindicated, manufacturer's standard components shall be used, as included in standardelevator systems and as required for complete system.

B. Elevator Description:

1. Elevator Number(s): PE-1, PE-2, (Passenger Elevators), SE-2, SE-3 (Service/ BedElevators)

2. Emergency Elevator Number(s): SE-3 designated as Fireman’s Lift3. Service/ Bed Elevator Number(s): SE-1, SE-2, SE-3 (Service/ Bed Elevators)4. Machine Location: Machine room above hoistway

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :






5. Machine Type: Gearless traction.6. Rated Load: 3000 lb (1362 kg) 20 passengers7. Freight Loading Class for Service Elevator(s): Class A.8. Rated Speed: 2.5 m/sec for Passenger Elevators and Service Elevators9. Operation System: Group automatic operation with demand-based dispatching10. Auxiliary Operations:

a. Standby power operation.b. Battery-powered lowering.c. Automatic dispatching of loaded car.d. Nuisance call cancel.e. Emergency hospital, Priority service at all floors.f. Loaded-car bypass.g. Distributed parking.

11. Security Feature: Card-reader operation.12. Dual Car-Control Stations: Provide two car-control stations in each elevator; equip

only one with required keyswitches if any.13. Car Enclosures:

a. Inside Width: 1800mm from side wall to side wall.b. Inside Depth: 1700mm from back wall to front wall (return panels).c. Inside Height: 2400 for PE , 2400mm for SE to underside of ceiling.d. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.e. Interior Finishes: Refer to Architectural Details Series 900f. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.g. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.h. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finishi. Ceiling: Luminous ceiling (soft illumination) for PE, Satin stainless steel, No. 4

finish for SEj. Handrails: Satn stainless solid bar 100mm H at sides and rear of cark. Bumper rails (for SE): 100mm above cab floorl. Floor prepared to receive stone finish same as lobby floor.

14. Hoistway Entrances:

a. Width: 1100mmb. Height: 2100mmc. Type: Two-speed center openingd. Frames All floors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.e. Doors: All floors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish

15. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.16. Additional Requirements:

a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover withframe made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

b. Provide hooks for protective pads in SE-3 car and two complete set(s) of full-height protective pads.

17. Note:a. SE-1 (Service/ Bed elevator) will be deferred.b. PE-3 and PE-4 (Passenger Elevators) will be deferred.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :






2.4 TRACTION SYSTEMS

A. Elevator Machines: Variable-voltage, variable-frequency, ac-type hoisting machines orvariable-voltage dc-type hoisting machines and solid-state power converters.

1. Limit total harmonic distortion of regenerated power to 5 percent per IEEE 519.2. Provide means for absorbing regenerated power when elevator system is operating

on standby power.

B. Fluid for Hydraulic Buffers: If using hydraulic buffers, use only fire-resistant fluid.

C. Machine Beams: Provide framing to support elevator hoisting machine and deflectorsheaves from the building structure. Comply with Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications"for materials and fabrication.

D. Guides: Roller guides or polymer-coated, nonlubricated sliding guides. Provide guides attop and bottom of car and counterweight frames.

2.5 OPERATION SYSTEMS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation systems as required toprovide type of operation indicated.

B. Group Automatic Operation with Demand-Based Dispatching: Provide reprogrammablegroup automatic system that assigns cars to hall calls based on a dispatching programdesigned to minimize passenger waiting time. System automatically adjusts to demandchanges for different traffic conditions including heavy incoming, heavy two-way, heavyoutgoing, and light off-hours as variations of normal two-way traffic.


a. KONEb. Mitsubishi Electricc. Schindler

C. Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the followingoperational features for elevators where indicated:1.2. Group Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, cars are returned,

one at a time, to a designated floor and parked with doors open. If a car cannot bereturned, it is removed from the system. When all cars have been returned orremoved from the system, one car can be put in service on standby power by aselector switch in control panel located at fire command station.

3. Group Battery-Powered Lowering: If power fails, cars that are at a floor remain at thatfloor, open their doors, and shut down. Cars that are between floors are lowered oneat a time to the next floor below, open their doors, and shut down. System includesrechargeable battery and automatic recharging system.

4. Independent Service: Keyswitch in car-control station removes car from groupoperation and allows it to respond only to car calls.

5. Emergency Hospital/Priority Service: Service is initiated by a keyswitch or card readerat designated floors. One elevator is removed from group operation and directed tothe floor where service was initiated. Car is placed in operation by selecting a floorand pressing door close button or by operating keyswitch to put car in independent

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





service. After responding to floor selected or being removed from independent service, car is returned to group operation.

6. Keyswitch Operation: Push buttons are activated and deactivated by security keyswitches at car-control stations.

2.6 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES

A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening device with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.

B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustabletime, through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shallbegin to close at reduced kinetic energy.

2.7 CAR ENCLOSURES

A. General: Provide enameled-steel car enclosures to receive removable wall panels, withremovable car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation.

1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 on car tops whererequired by ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:

1. Stainless-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet.

2. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet.

3. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors.4. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick.5. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic

or other permanent rigid plastic.6. Metal Ceiling: Flush panels, with standard manufacturer’s lighting fixtures. Align

ceiling panel joints with joints between wall panels.7. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of shape, metal, and finish indicated.

2.8 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-framehoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Framesize and profile shall accommodate hoistway wall construction.

1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, frames shall be self-supportingwith reinforced head sections.

B. Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies shall comply withNFPA 80 and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction based on testing at as close-to-neutral pressure as possibleaccording to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





1. Fire-Protection Rating: 1-1/2 hours with 30-minute temperature rise of 450 deg F(250 deg C)].

C. Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:

1. Enameled-Steel Frames: Formed from cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. Provide withfactory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's fullrange.

2. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet.3. Star of Life Symbol: Identify emergency elevators with star of life symbol, not less

than 3 inches (76 mm) high, on both inside surfaces of hoistway door frames.4. Stainless-Steel Doors and Transoms: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated

from stainless-steel sheet5. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges.6. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick.7. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.

2.9 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit untilcall has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with LEDs.

B. Car-Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard car-control stations. Mount in returnpanel adjacent to car door unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car-control station, with text and graphics asrequired by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Emergency Communication System: Two-way voice communication system, with visiblesignal, which dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and does not requirehandset use. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructionsfor use, and battery backup power supply.

D. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted cabinettelephone jack in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-waytelephone communication service specified in MEPF Specs “Fire-Alarm System."

E. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located abovecar door or above car-control station. Also, provide audible signal to indicate to passengersthat car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. Include travel directionarrows if not provided in car-control station.

F. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing as indicated.

G. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings.Provide the following:

1. Manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units, for mounting above entrance frames.

H. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival anddirection of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down.

I. Fire-Command-Center Annunciator Panel: Provide panel containing illuminated positionindicators for each elevator, clearly labeled with elevator designation; include illuminated

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :





signal that indicates when elevator is operational and when it is at the designated emergency return level with doors open. Provide standby power elevator selector switch(es), as required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44, adjacent to position indicators. Provide illuminated signal that indicates when normal power supply has failed.

J. Emergency Pictorial Signs: Fabricate from materials matching hall push-button stations,with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide one sign ateach hall push-button station unless otherwise indicated.

2.10 FINISH MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed,matte finish.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

D. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

E. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.

G. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS or Type HGL.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts tominimize vibration transmission to structure and structure-borne noise due to elevatorsystem.

B. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers.

C. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8 inch (3 mm), up or down, regardless of load and travel direction.

D. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly withnonshrink, nonmetallic grout.

E. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations between two elevators atcenter of group or at location most convenient for approaching passengers.

2. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance.3. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches (1829 mm) above finished floor.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :







A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevatoruse (either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required andrecommended by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and agencies.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Use: Limit temporary use for construction purposes to one elevator. Complywith the following requirements for the elevator used for construction purposes:

1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finishedcar, to protect finishes from damage.

2. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures asneeded to protect elevator and elevator equipment.

3. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service.4. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of

correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, makerequired repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnelto operate, adjust, and maintain elevator(s).

3.5 MAINTENANCE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shallinclude 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Includemonthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speedand capacity.


PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 224300 – MEDICAL PLUMBING FIXTURES

22 - PLUMBING



SECTION 224300 - HEALTHCARE PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following healthcare fixtures and specialties to supplement conventionalplumbing fixtures specified in other Division 22 Sections:

1. Healthcare water closets.2. Healthcare showers.3. Healthcare bathing units.4. Bedpan washers.5. Clinic sinks.6. Plaster sinks.7. Scrub sinks.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 22 Section "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures" for emergency showers and eye-wash units.

2. Division 22 Section "Residential Plumbing Fixtures" for residential fixtures for use inhealthcare facilities, but not requiring special healthcare fixture attributes.

3. Division 22 Section "Commercial Water Closets" for conventional water closets,flushometer valves, carriers, and seats for use healthcare facilities, but not requiringspecial healthcare fixture attributes.

4. Division 22 Section "Commercial Urinals" for urinals for use in healthcare facilities.5. Division 22 Section "Commercial Lavatories" for lavatories for use in healthcare

facilities, but not requiring special healthcare fixture attributes.6. Division 22 Section "Commercial Sinks" for sinks for use in healthcare facilities, but

not requiring special healthcare fixture attributes.7. Division 22 Section "Commercial Showers, Receptors, and Basins" for showers for

use in healthcare facilities, but not requiring special healthcare fixture attributes.



B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures and faucets to include in operationand maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and MaintenanceData," include the following:

a. Servicing and adjustments of [flushometer valves] [healthcare bathing units]

[and] [bedpan washer/sanitizers].

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



22 - PLUMBING



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HEALTHCARE WATER CLOSETS

A. Healthcare Water Closets <Insert drawing designation>: Wall mounted, [top] [back]

spud[, accessible].

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the

following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to, the following]:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product

indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or

designation> or comparable product by one of the following:

a. American Standard America.b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C.c. Kohler Co.d. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.

e. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

3. Bowl:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.b. Material: Vitreous china.c. Type: Siphon jet.d. Style: Flushometer valve.e. Height: Standard.f. Rim Contour: Elongated with bedpan lugs or slots.

g. Water Consumption: [1.28 gal. (4.8 L)] [1.6 gal. (6 L)] per flush.h. Spud Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40).

4. Flushometer Valve: <Insert flushometer-valve designation>.

5. Toilet Seat: <Insert toilet-seat designation>.6. Support:

a. Standard: ASME A112.6.1M.b. Description: Waste-fitting assembly as required to match drainage piping

material and arrangement with faceplates, couplings gaskets, and feet; bolts

and hardware matching fixture.[ Include additional extension coupling,

faceplate, and feet for installation in wide pipe space.]

c. Water-Closet Mounting Height: [Standard] [Child] [Handicapped/elderly

according to ICC A117.1].

B. Healthcare Water Closets <Insert drawing designation>: Floor mounted, floor outlet, [top]

[back] spud[, accessible].








PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



22 - PLUMBING



a. American Standard America.b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C.c. Kohler Co.d. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.


3. Bowl:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.b. Material: Vitreous china.c. Type: Siphon jet.d. Style: Flushometer valve.

e. Height: [Standard] [Handicapped/elderly].f. Rim Contour: Elongated with bedpan lugs or slots.

g. Water Consumption: [1.28 gal. (4.8 L)] [1.6 gal. (6 L)] per flush.h. Spud Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40).


5. Toilet Seat: <Insert toilet-seat designation>.

2.2 FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Lever-Handle, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves <Insert designation>.








a. Delany Flush Valves.b. Sloan Valve Company.c. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.

d. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

3. Standard: ASSE 1037.4. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).5. Features: Integral check stop, backflow-prevention device, and outlet-tube-mounted

bedpan washer.6. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.7. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated.8. Style: Exposed.

9. Consumption: [1.28 gal. (4.8 L)] [1.6 gal. (6 L)] [3.5 gal. (13.2 L)] <Insert value> perflush.

10. Minimum Inlet: NPS 1 (DN 25).11. Minimum Outlet: NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32), extended length.

2.3 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats <Insert designation>.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



22 - PLUMBING









a. Centoco Manufacturing Corporation.b. Church Seats.c. Kohler Co.d. Olsonite Seat Co.e. Sperzel of Lexington.f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.

g. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

3. Standard: IAPMO Z124.5.4. Material: Plastic with antimicrobial agent.

5. Type: [Commercial (standard)] [Commercial (heavy duty)].6. Shape: Elongated rim, open front.7. Hinge: Check.8. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal.9. Color: White.

2.4 HEALTHCARE SHOWERS

A. Healthcare Showers <Insert drawing designation>: Accessible, [glass-fiber-reinforced

plastic] [acrylic].








a. Aqua Glass Corporation.b. Clarion Bathware.c. Florestone Products Co., Inc.

d. <Insert manufacturer's name>.e. Aqua Bath Company, Inc.f. Aqua Glass Corporation.g. Clarion Bathware.h. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C.

i. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

3. Standard: ANSI Z124.1.2 and complying with ICC A117.1 for roll-in shower compartments.

4. Nominal Size: [60 by 36 inches (1524 by 915 mm)] <Insert dimensions>.

5. Surround: One piece[ or sealed, multiple piece].6. Surround: One piece.7. Bathing Surface: Slip resistant according to ASTM F 462.

8. Color: [White] <Insert color>.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



22 - PLUMBING


9. Drain Location: [Left side] [Center] [Right side].10. Accessibility Options: Include grab bar and bench.

11. Faucet: <Insert healthcare shower-faucet designation>.12. Drain: Grid, NPS 2 (DN 50), complying with ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

2.5 HEALTHCARE SHOWER FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - HealthEffects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Healthcare Shower Faucets <Insert drawing designation>: Pressure-balance mixingvalve.








a. American Standard America.b. Chicago Faucets.c. Ferguson Enterprises, Inc.; ProFlo Brand.d. Kohler Co.e. Lawler Manufacturing Co., Inc.f. Leonard Valve Company.g. Matco-Norca.h. Moen Incorporated.i. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.j. Speakman Company.k. Zurn Industries, LLC; AquaSpec Commercial Faucet Products.

l. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

3. Faucet:

a. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and ASSE 1016.b. Body Material: Solid brass.c. Finish: Polished chrome plate.

d. Maximum Flow Rate: [2.5 gpm (9.5 L/min.)] <Insert value> unless otherwiseindicated.

e. Mounting: [Concealed] [Exposed].

f. Operation: Single-handle, [push-pull] [or] [twist or rotate] control.

g. Antiscald Device: [Integral with mixing valve] [Separate unit] [Not required].h. Check Stops: Check-valve type, integral with or attached to body; on hot- and

cold-water-supply connections.i. Indicators: For hot and cold water.

4. Shower Head:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

b. Type: [Ball joint with arm and flange] [Without ball joint, but with arm and

flange] [Ball joint and head integral with mounting flange] [Integral with

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



22 - PLUMBING


mounting flange] [Hand held, slide bar mounted] [Hand held, hook

mounted] <Insert type>. c. Shower Head Material: Metallic with chrome-plated finish.

d. Spray Pattern: [Adjustable] [Fixed].

e. Integral Volume Control: [Not required] [Required].

f. Shower-Arm, Flow-Control Fitting: [Not required] [1.5 gpm (5.7 L/min.)] [2.0

gpm (7.6 L/min.)].

g. Temperature Indicator: [Integral with faucet] [Not required].

2.6 HEALTHCARE BATHING UNITS

A. Healthcare Bathing Units <Insert drawing designation>: [Side] [Transfer-lift] [Slide-on]

entry, [adjustable] [fixed] height.








a. ARJO, Inc.b. Clarion Bathware.c. Invacare Continuing Care Group.


3. Fixture: Plastic-tub, institutional bath fixture with integral controls.

a. Tub Size: [60 by 30 inches (1524 by 762 mm)] <Insert dimensions>.b. Controls: Vacuum breakers on supplies, thermostatic mixing valve, tub fill

spout, and hand-held shower head.

4. Supply Connections: [NPS 3/4 (DN 20)] [NPS 1 (DN 25)] with shutoff valve.

5. Drain: Manufacturer's standard [NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)] [NPS 2 (DN 50)] with tailpiece.

6. Drain Piping: [NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)] [NPS 2 (DN 50)] cast-brass P-trap, waste to wall,and wall flange complying with ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2. Include combineddrain piping if two drains.

7. Lift System: [Not required] <Insert description>.8. Unit Electrical Characteristics:

a. Volts: [120] [240] [277] [480] <Insert number>.

b. Phase(s): [One] [Three].

c. Hertz: [60] <Insert number>.

d. Full-Load Amperes: <Insert value>.

e. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: <Insert value>.

f. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: <Insert amperage>.

B. Healthcare Bathing Units <Insert drawing designation>: Front-entry shower.



PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



22 - PLUMBING








a. ARJO, Inc.b. Invacare Continuing Care Group.

c. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

3. Fixture: Plastic-tub, institutional fixture with integral controls.

a. Cabinet Size: [35 by 41 inches (889 by 1041 mm)] <Insert dimensions>.b. Controls: Vacuum breakers on supplies, thermostatic mixing valve, tub fill

spout, and hand-held shower head.

4. Supply Connections: [NPS 3/4 (DN 20)] [NPS 1 (DN 25)] with shutoff valve.5. Drain: Manufacturer's standard NPS 2 (DN 50) with tailpiece.6. Drain Piping: NPS 2 (DN 50) P-trap, waste to wall, and wall flange complying with

ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2. Include combined drain piping if two drains.7. Unit Electrical Characteristics:

a. Volts: [120] [240] [277] [480] <Insert number>.

b. Phase(s): [One] [Three].

c. Hertz: [60] <Insert number>.

d. Full-Load Amperes: <Insert value>.

e. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: <Insert value>.

f. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: <Insert amperage>.

2.7 BEDPAN WASHERS

A. Bedpan Washers <Insert drawing designation>: Wall mounted, compact.








a. American Standard America.b. Chicago Faucets.c. Kohler Co.d. Speakman Company.e. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.f. Whitehall Manufacturing; a division of Acorn Engineering Company.

g. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

3. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

4. Hose Assembly: [48-inch- (1220-mm-)] <Insert dimension> long rubber or vinylhose with self-closing, hand-held spray nozzle, wall bracket, and hook.

5. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001, atmospheric, wall mounted.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



22 - PLUMBING


6. Shutoff Valve: Wall-mounted, [cross-handle] <Insert type> supply stop upstream ofvacuum breaker.

7. Connecting Piping: Concealed.8. Finish: Polished chrome-plated finish on exposed metal parts.

9. Supply Connection: [NPS 1/2 (DN 15)] <Insert size>.

2.8 BEDPAN WASHING EQUIPMENT

A. Bedpan Washers/Sanitizers <Insert drawing designation>: [Recessed] [Wall] mounted.








a. STERIS Corporation.

b. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

3. Fixture:

a. Construction: Cast-iron chamber and P-trap waste assembly with spray

nozzles and [enameled] [stainless]-steel front panel and cover box. b. Controls: Electric, 120-V ac, automatic operation with timer, solenoid valves,

and circuit breaker.c. Door Mechanism: Foot-pedal operation.

4. Supply Connections: NPS 1 (DN 25) cold water and NPS 3/8 (DN 10) [hot water]

[steam].5. Drain Piping: NPS 3 (DN 80) P-trap and soil pipe.6. Atmospheric Vent Connection: NPS 2 (DN 50).7. Mounting Hardware: Matching fixture-mounting arrangement.8. Accessories:

a. Bedpan Rack(s): [One] [Two] <Insert number>.

b. Urinal Rack(s): [One] [Two] <Insert number>.

c. Drain Tray(s): [One] [Two] <Insert number>.

2.9 CLINIC SINKS

A. Clinic Sinks <Insert drawing designation>: Floor mounted.








a. American Standard America.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



22 - PLUMBING


b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C.c. Kohler Co.d. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.


3. Fixture: Bottom-outlet, vitreous-china, siphon-jet, flushing-rim, service sink.


b. Nominal Size: [27 by 20 inches (685 by 510 mm)] <Insert dimensions>.c. Color: White.d. Rim Guards: Stainless steel on front.

4. Sink Base: [10 inches (254 mm)] <Insert dimension> high; cast terrazzo if required.


6. Faucet: <Insert sink-faucet designation>.7. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.

2.10 PLASTER SINKS

A. Plaster Sinks <Insert drawing designation>: Wall mounted, vitreous china.








a. American Standard America.b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C.c. Kohler Co.


3. Fixture:

a. Standard: ASMA A112.19.2/CSA B45.1.b. Type: Utility sink.

c. Nominal Size: [24 by 22 inches (610 by 560 mm)] [30 by 22 inches (762 by

560 mm)] <Insert dimensions> with back.d. Color: White.

e. Faucet Holes: [One] [Two] in back.

f. Drain: Grid, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)[ with NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) to NPS 2 (DN 50)

adaptor].

4. Faucet: <Insert sink-faucet designation>.5. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.

6. Drain Piping: [NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)] [NPS 2 (DN 50)] chrome-plated brass; 0.045-inch-(1.1-mm-) thick waste to interceptor; interceptor to wall; and wall flange complyingwith ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

7. Plaster Interceptor:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products

by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



22 - PLUMBING


manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work

include, but are not limited to, the following]: b. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

[product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product

name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following:

1) Josam Company.2) MIFAB, Inc.3) Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.4) Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.5) Watts Drainage Products; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.6) Zurn Industries, LLC; Specification Drainage Products.

7) <Insert manufacturer's name>.

c. Description: Cast-iron or steel body and removable cover with acid-resistant-enameled interior lining and outside coating; removable, corrosion-resistant

metal screens or strainer; and [NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)] [NPS 2 (DN 50)] inlet andoutlet.

8. Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type III sink carrier with white-enameled-steel brackets.

2.11 SCRUB SINKS

A. Scrub Sinks <Insert drawing designation>: Vitreous china, wall mounted.








a. American Standard America.b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C.c. Kohler Co.


3. Fixture:


b. Nominal Size: [28 by 22 inches (710 by 560 mm)] [30 by 22 inches (762 by

560 mm)] <Insert dimensions> with back or ledge with one faucet hole.c. Color: White.

d. Drain: [Grid] <Insert type>, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40).

4. Faucet: <Insert sink-faucet designation>.5. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.6. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article.7. Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type I, Type II, or Type III sink carrier.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



22 - PLUMBING


2.12 SINK FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - HealthEffects," for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Sink Faucets <Insert drawing designation>: Manual-operation mixing valve.








a. American Standard America.b. Chicago Faucets.c. Delta Faucet Company.d. Elkay Manufacturing Co.e. Fisher Manufacturing Co.f. GROHE America, Inc.g. Just Manufacturing.h. Kohler Co.i. Moen Incorporation.j. Speakman Company.k. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.l. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.

m. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

3. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.4. Configuration: Hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies

and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor.

5. Body Type: [Centerset] [Widespread] [Single hole] <Insert type>.6. Body Material: Solid brass.

7. Finish: [Chrome plated] [Polished chrome plate] <Insert finish>.

8. Maximum Flow Rate: [2.2 gpm (8.3 L/min.)] [2.5 gpm (9.5 L/min.)] <Insert value>.

9. Control: [Lever] [Cross, four-arm] [Wrist-blade, 4-inch (102-mm)] [Elbow, 6-inch

(152-mm)] <Insert type> handle(s).

10. Control: [Foot pedal] [Knee action] <Insert type>.

11. Mounting Type: [Deck, concealed] [Deck, exposed] [Back/wall, exposed] <Insert

type>.

12. Spout Type: [Rigid] [Swivel], [low profile] [gooseneck] <Insert type>.

13. Vacuum Breaker: [Required] [Not required] for hose outlet.

14. Spout Outlet: [Aerator] [Laminar flow] [Hose thread] [Plain end] [Spray] <Insert

type>.

2.13 LAMINAR-FLOW, FAUCET-SPOUT OUTLETS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the

following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following]:

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



22 - PLUMBING


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product

indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>or comparable product by one of the following:

1. AM Conservation Group, Inc.2. Chronomite Laboratories, Inc.; a division of Acorn Engineering Company.3. NEOPERL, Inc.

4. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

C. Description: Chrome-plated brass, faucet-spout outlet that produces non-aerating, laminarstream. Include external or internal thread that mates with faucet outlet for attachment tofaucets where indicated and flow-rate range that includes faucet flow.

D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - HealthEffects," for faucet-spout-outlet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

2.14 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - HealthEffects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve withinlet connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: [Loose key] [Wheel handle] <Insert type>.

F. Risers: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) [chrome-plated, rigid-copper pipe and brass straight or offset

tailpieces] [chrome-plated, soft-copper flexible tube] [ASME A112.18.6, braided or

corrugated stainless-steel, flexible hose].

2.15 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: [Grid] <Insert type> with NPS 1-1/2 DN 40 tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40).

2. Material: Chrome-plated, [two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-

inch- (0.83-mm-) thick brass tube to wall] [two-piece, cast-brass trap and

ground-joint swivel elbow with 0.032-inch- (0.83-mm-) thick brass tube to wall]

[one-piece, cast-brass trap with swivel 0.029-inch- (73-mm-) thick tubular brass

wall bend] <Insert trap type>; and chrome-plated brass or steel wall flange.3. Material: Stainless-steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch- (0.30-mm-)

thick stainless-steel tube to wall; and stainless-steel wall flange.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



22 - PLUMBING


2.16 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install healthcare plumbing fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

C. Install floor-mounted healthcare water closets on bowl-to-drain, connecting fittingattachments to piping or building substrate.

D. Install counter-mounted fixtures in and attached to casework.

E. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water-distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behindfixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valve if supply stops are not specified with fixture.Comply with valve requirements specified in Division 22 Section "General-DutyValves for Plumbing Piping."

F. Install flushometer valves on healthcare water closets.

G. Install flushometer valves for accessible healthcare water closets, with lever handle mountedon wide side of compartment.

H. Install toilet seats on healthcare water closets.

I. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts, iffaucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

J. Install laminar-flow, faucet-spout fittings in faucet spouts where laminar-flow fittings arespecified.

K. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.

L. Install traps on fixture outlets.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



22 - PLUMBING


1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

M. Set healthcare showers in leveling bed of cement grout.

N. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste pipingof accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Plumbing PipingInsulation."

O. Seal joints between healthcare plumbing fixtures, counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.Comply with sealant requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

P. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply withescutcheon requirements specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for PlumbingPiping."

Q. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and ventpiping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

R. Comply with requirements for water piping specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic WaterPiping."

S. Comply with requirements for soil and waste drainage piping[ and vent piping] specified inDivision 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

T. Comply with requirements for atmospheric vent piping specified in Division 22 Section"Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

U. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste pipingof accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Plumbing PipingInsulation."

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning healthcareplumbing fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at [faucets] [and] [flushometer valves] to produce proper flow.

C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.


A. After installing healthcare plumbing fixtures, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean healthcare plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers'recommended cleaning methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of healthcare plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved inwriting by Owner.

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



22 - PLUMBING



PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :


BGHMC compound, Baguio City, Philippines 313116 – TERMITE CONTROL

31 – EARTHWORK


SECTION 313116

TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK: This section covers the furnishing of all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to perform the completion of ground and soil treatment using an Anti-Termite Reticulation System. Establish termite killing zones in the soil as herein specified.

1.2 QUALIFICATION: Specified work shall be done only by licensed and certified pesticide applicators. Applicator shall be familiar with all the works involved and shall hire only skilled personnel familiar with soil and ground treatment works.

1.3 GUARANTEE and WARRANTY: The applicator shall give a certificate of guarantee for a minimum of five years to a maximum of 10 years. Provide soil-poisoning treatment that shall prevent subterranean termites from attacking the building on its content for a period of not less than five (5) years and a maximum of ten (10) years guarantee.

A warranty period must be given to the owner in case of unpredictable circumstances. This warranty should cover for material damage and must be given immediate labor assistance.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE: Materials specified must be delivered at least ten days before its actual installation. All materials shall be handled with care. Any damage done shall not be charged to the owner and must be replaced immediately. A suitable place for storage should be accommodated within the site.

1.5 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED: The contractor shall comply with all the laws, City-Municipal Ordinances and all government Specifications and regulations in so far as they are binding upon or affect the portion of the work hereto. The Contractor or those engaged thereon shall obtain all necessary licenses and permits and be responsible for all damages to persons or property that may occur in connection with the prosecution of the work.

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL: All materials that will be specified herein shall be under strict compliance to the quality required by the project. All materials, if necessary, should undergo tests. All test results should be submitted to the Architect in charge and the Owner before and after delivery of materials to the site. If tests are not needed, all materials should pass the judgment of the Architect and the Owner. Materials delivered to the site, which are not approved by the Architect, should be returned immediately to the supplier.

PART 2.0 PRODUCT

1.02 Submittals:

A. Anti-Termite Reticulation System

1. Layout plan2. Shop drawings3. Installation program

B. Product Data

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



31 – EARTHWORK


1. Technical Brochure2. Material Safety Data Sheet3. Fertilizer & Pesticide Authority (FPA) Product Registration Certificate4. Intellectual Property Office Certificate of Patent

Registration-Anti-Termite Reticulation System.

C. Authority Issued by Patent Owner to use Anti-Termite Reticulation System.

1.03 Regulatory Requirement:

Conform to Manufacturer’s application guide for soil treatment as approved by the FPA.

1.04 Quality Assurance:

A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with the manufacturer’sinstructions and recommendations for soil treatment work.

B. Use only termiticides as herein specified that bears a FPA registration number.

1.05 Specified Product & Service Commitment:

A. Furnish a written certification that:

8. The Anti-Termite Reticulation System has been installed in accordance with theapproved lay-out and installation program.

9. The soil treatment work was undertaken and completed as specified and inaccordance with the application program as herein defined.

B. Provide post-completion service commitment for a period of three (3) years from dateof project completion signed by the Pest Control Operator and General Contractorstating that:

1. Comprehensive inspection and monitoring work will be undertaken every six (6)months until the end of the three (3) year service commitment.

2. In the event of any discovery of termite activity during the three (3) year warrantyperiod, the Contractor shall abate such termite infestation and re-treat the soil atno additional cost to the Owners.

1.06 Delivery and Storage:

Termiticides shall be delivered to project site in sealed & labeled containers as supplied by manufacturer. The label shall be complete with application and safety instructions and bear the FPA registration number. Temporary storage of insecticides utilized at the project site shall be allowed subject to the following site safety requirements.

Part 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL:

General provision of the contract, conditions and special conditions apply to all works specified herein.

2.02 Scope of Work-Description:

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



31 – EARTHWORK


Supply of materials, labor, supervision, tools, equipment, and such other items necessary in the effective implementation of termite management service work.

1. Installation of Anti-Termite Reticulation System2. Soil treatment Work

2.03 Materials:

A. Anti-termite Reticulation System

1. Julant-designed Reticulation pipes and related components.2. Filler point covers.

For approval by Design Consultant

B. Soil Treatment Chemicals:

Only FPA – approved, non-repellent chemicals will be used. Provide a chemicalsolution consisting only of one of the following:

a. Premise SC 200 (Imidacloprid)b. Agenda 2.5 EC (Fipronil)c. Biflex 10 TC (Bifenthrin)

or approved equal

Part 3: EXECUTION

3.01 Installation of Anti-Termite Reticulation System

A. Use the approved lay-out plans and installation program. Any deviation must haveprior approval of the Design Consultants.

B. Conduct sample operationability test on reticulated pipe segments installed beforethey are finally covered. The Construction Manager must certify that the test hasbeen successfully undertaken.

C. Upon completion, submit an as-built plan and operating instruction of the system.D. Ensure that all filler point covers are properly installed and that they conform with the

Designer’s specification.

3.02 Soil Treatment Work

A. Initial Treatment:

1. At the time of soil treatment application, the soil shall preferably be in friablecondition with sufficiently low moisture content to allow uniform distribution oftreatment solution throughout the treatment area. Toxicant shall be applied as acourse spray and in such a manner as to provide uniform distribution of thechemical in the soil.

2. Do not apply toxicant during or immediately following heavy rains or whenconditions will cause runoff and create environment hazard.

3. Apply toxicant solution to establish termite killing zones in the soil in accordancewith the manufacturer’s dilution and dosage rate (refer to Julant’s soil treatmentprogram).

B. Post-Construction Treatment:

4. As soon as the building is substantially completed prior to final turn over, toxicant

PROJECT :

LOCATION :

SECTION :

DIVISION :



31 – EARTHWORK


solution is applied to establish termite killing zones, thru the installed Anti-Termite Reticulation System.

5. Use the chemical as herein specified.

C. Provide certification that the soil treatment work was undertaken, as specified.


baguio general hospital medical center proposed multi ...

Documents

Transcript of baguio general hospital medical center proposed multi ...